Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Inventor Tutorials
Inventor Tutorials
Chapter 1
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What are Projects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What Else Do Projects Control? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understand Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Examine a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Understand Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Select a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Use the Projects Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Test Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Manage Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Use Paths in Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Refine your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Use Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Control Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
File Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Use Other Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 2
Navigation
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview: SteeringWheels . . . .
Hands-on Demo: ViewCube . . . .
Switch Views . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More about Orbit . . . . . . . . .
Home View . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels .
Click and Hold . . . . . . . . . .
Pan and Screen Size . . . . . . . .
Orbit and Pivot Point . . . . . . .
Up and Down . . . . . . . . . . .
Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Walk and Look . . . . . . . . . .
Other Features . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summar y . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
Sketch
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 20
. 22
. 23
. 23
. 23
. 24
. 24
. 25
. 25
. 26
. 27
. 27
. 28
. 28
. 28
. 29
. 29
. 30
. 30
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 33
. 34
. 36
. 37
. 38
. 41
. 42
. 43
. 44
. 45
. 46
. 47
. 48
. 49
. 51
. 52
Direct Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . .
Open the Sketch Profile file . . . . . .
Revolve the Sketch Profile . . . . . . .
Interpreting the In-Canvas Display . .
Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane .
Create a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . .
ii | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Chapter 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 53
. 55
. 56
. 57
. 61
. 63
Chapter 5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 64
. 65
. 69
. 71
. 74
. 79
. 81
. 84
. 90
. 94
Parts 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Create and Pattern a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Create a Revolved Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Use Save As to Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Create a Concentric Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Edit the Tapped Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Mirror a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 6
Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . .
Create the Mounting Base Profile . . .
Sketch on a Part Face . . . . . . . . . .
Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes .
Create a Tangent Work Plane . . . . .
Add the Base Mounting Holes . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 137
. 138
. 140
. 145
. 155
. 160
. 164
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid .
Create a Contact Set . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert and Constrain a Subassembly . . . .
Edit a Part in an Assembly . . . . . . . . .
Constrain Cylindrical Components . . . .
Add the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 168
. 170
. 171
. 176
. 179
. 185
. 191
. 198
. 204
Contents | iii
Chapter 8
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Projection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Section View . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Centerlines and Center Marks . .
Place Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Angular Dimensions . . . . . . .
Radial and Reference Dimensions . . .
Add a Hole Note . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open an Assembly Drawing . . . . . .
Place a Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders .
Adjust the Leader Arrowhead . . . . .
Place Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 207
. 208
. 209
. 211
. 212
. 217
. 220
. 226
. 229
. 231
. 233
. 234
. 238
. 242
. 245
. 246
. 249
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 251
. 252
. 253
. 255
. 259
. 260
. 265
. 267
Chapter 11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 269
. 271
. 272
. 272
. 274
. 275
. 276
. 287
. 289
. 294
. 298
iv | Contents
Interface Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . .
Set the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . .
Finish the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch to an Environment . . . . . . . . .
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar .
Use File Tabs and Edit the Part . . . . . . .
Increase Screen Space . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Parts List and Annotation . . . . .
Customize Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Your Own Tab Panels . . . . . . . .
Export Tab Settings to XML . . . . . . . .
Using Access Points through the Browser .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 12
Content
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 300
. 302
. 302
. 303
. 304
. 306
. 307
. 307
. 308
. 308
. 309
. 311
. 312
. 313
. 313
. 318
. 319
. 319
. 321
. 324
. 327
. 327
. 329
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 331
. 332
. 333
. 335
. 335
. 336
. 338
. 340
. 343
. 344
. 345
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 347
. 348
. 349
. 352
. 355
. 359
. 367
Contents | v
Chapter 14
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create the External Table . . . . . . . .
Finish the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Review Parameter Assignment Process .
Open a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
Link Your External Table . . . . . . . . .
Prepare to Assign Parameters . . . . . .
Modify Your Sketch Dimensions . . . . .
Modify the Two Extrusions . . . . . . .
Modify the Chamfer Feature . . . . . . .
Modify the Hole Feature . . . . . . . . .
Control Your Part with Parameters . . .
Update Your Part . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 369
. 370
. 371
. 372
. 373
. 374
. 375
. 377
. 379
. 379
. 381
. 383
. 384
. 385
. 386
. 386
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 389
. 391
. 391
. 392
. 393
. 394
. 396
. 398
. 403
. 404
. 408
. 409
. 410
. 410
. 411
. 412
. 412
vi | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 420
. 422
. 425
. 427
. 435
. 436
Chapter 17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 448
. 454
. 458
. 459
. 460
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 477
. 479
. 479
. 480
. 481
. 482
. 484
. 484
. 486
. 486
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 489
. 491
. 492
. 494
. 496
. 499
. 500
Chapter 20
.
.
.
.
.
iFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
About this tutorial . . . . . . .
Create an iFeature . . . . . . .
Insert an iFeature . . . . . . . .
Place an iFeature . . . . . . . .
Modify the iFeature File . . . .
Place iFeatures from a Family .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 19
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 501
. 502
. 503
. 504
. 505
. 506
. 507
. 507
. 508
. 511
. 512
. 514
Contents | vii
Chapter 21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 517
. 521
. 524
. 529
. 533
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 536
. 538
. 538
. 540
. 542
. 543
. 544
. 545
. 545
. 547
. 547
. 549
Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
About this tutorial . . . . .
Get Started . . . . . . . . .
A Word about Color . . . .
Create Tweaks . . . . . . .
Tweak Clamp.ipt . . . . . .
Tweak the Retaining Ring .
Place an Exploded View on
Edit the Explosion . . . . .
Associative Drawing View .
Rotational Tweaks . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 23
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
a
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Drawing .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 551
. 552
. 554
. 556
. 560
. 561
. 563
. 564
. 568
. 568
. 571
viii | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 573
. 576
. 578
. 583
. 586
. 587
. 593
. 595
. 600
. 605
Create a Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Holes to a Single Body . . . . . .
Insert a Toolbody Using Derive . . . .
Moving Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Combine Command . . . . .
Create a Body Using Revolve . . . . .
Export the Design as Individual Parts .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 607
. 617
. 617
. 618
. 620
. 621
. 622
. 623
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 625
. 626
. 626
. 626
. 627
. 627
. 628
. 628
. 628
Chapter 26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 629
. 630
. 630
. 630
. 630
. 631
. 632
. 633
. 633
. 633
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 635
. 636
. 637
. 638
. 640
. 642
. 642
. 643
. 643
. 644
. 645
Contents | ix
Chapter 27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iCopy:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Use
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 645
. 646
. 647
. 647
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 649
. 650
. 654
. 658
. 659
. 663
. 665
. 667
. 671
. 673
. 674
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 676
. 678
. 680
. 680
. 685
. 688
. 688
. 690
iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
x | Contents
.
.
.
.
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Target Assembly . . . . . . . . .
iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constrain iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern . . . .
Copy and Reuse iCopy Components .
iCopy: File Names . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 29
.
.
.
.
Chapter 28
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 691
. 692
. 694
. 696
. 696
. 697
. 700
. 701
. 710
. 713
. 714
. 717
. 726
. 728
. 736
Chapter 30
Chapter 31
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 739
. 741
. 745
. 747
. 749
. 752
. 757
. 765
. 766
. 767
. 772
. 775
. 781
Chapter 32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 783
. 784
. 786
. 787
. 789
. 790
. 795
. 800
. 805
. 809
. 812
. 818
Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . .
Start the Shaft Generator . . . . . . . . . .
2D and 3D Dynamic Preview . . . . . . . .
Add Shaft Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Shaft Element Type . . . . . . . . .
Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section . .
Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section .
Change Dimensions of Cone Section . . . .
Change Dimensions of the Next Section . .
Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section . . . . .
Insert Cylindrical Bore . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 819
. 820
. 821
. 821
. 822
. 823
. 825
. 826
. 826
. 827
. 830
. 831
. 832
. 834
Contents | xi
Chapter 33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 835
. 836
. 836
. 838
. 839
. 840
. 841
. 842
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 845
. 846
. 847
. 851
. 853
. 856
. 859
. 860
. 862
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 863
. 864
. 865
. 867
. 868
. 868
. 870
. 871
. 872
. 872
. 873
. 874
. 876
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . .
Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . .
Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and
Select Type of Bearing . . . . . . . .
Set Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . .
Update the Bearing List . . . . . . .
Select Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform the Calculation . . . . . . .
xii | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 35
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 34
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Start Plane .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 877
. 878
. 879
. 882
. 882
. 883
. 883
. 884
Chapter 36
Disc
Compression
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 884
. 885
. 887
. 887
. 890
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 891
. 893
. 894
. 895
. 896
. 897
. 898
. 899
. 900
. 901
. 902
Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Chapter 38
.
.
.
.
.
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Chapter 37
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 905
. 907
. 908
. 912
. 914
. 915
. 917
Weldments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Steps Overview . . . . . . . . .
Weldment Feature Groups . . . . . . . .
Open an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weld Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead . . . . . . .
Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) .
Complete the Cosmetic Weld . . . . . .
Weld Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complete the Weld Extent . . . . . . . .
Create a 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . .
Complete the 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . .
Change Weld Symbol Visibility . . . . .
Add a Machining Feature . . . . . . . .
Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 919
. 920
. 922
. 924
. 925
. 926
. 927
. 928
. 930
. 930
. 931
. 932
. 934
. 934
. 935
Contents | xiii
Chapter 39
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 936
. 937
. 937
. 939
. 940
. 940
. 941
. 942
. 943
. 944
. 945
. 946
. 948
Chapter 40
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 950
. 952
. 954
. 956
. 958
. 960
. 963
. 965
. 968
. 971
. 973
. 975
. 976
. 979
. 981
. 983
. 985
xiv | Contents
Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry .
Create a Contour Roll . . . . . . . . .
Create a Second Contour Roll . . . . .
Add another Contour Flange . . . . . .
Flatten the Rolled Tube . . . . . . . . .
Unfold and Refold Feature Pair . . . . .
Continue Unfold Selection . . . . . . .
Partially Unfold the Tube . . . . . . . .
Complete the Unfold Feature . . . . .
Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern the Hole . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Two Refold Features . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 41
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1017
. 1019
. 1022
. 1023
. 1026
. 1028
. 1030
. 1032
. 1036
. 1040
. 1044
. 1046
. 1048
. 1050
Chapter 42
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1054
. 1056
. 1057
. 1057
. 1058
. 1060
. 1062
. 1063
. 1065
. 1069
. 1071
. 1071
. 1073
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1075
. 1077
. 1077
. 1079
. 1081
. 1086
. 1087
. 1090
. 1091
. 1094
. 1097
. 1098
. 1100
. 1102
Contents | xv
Chapter 43
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1103
. 1106
. 1108
. 1109
. 1114
. 1117
. 1118
. 1118
. 1119
. 1119
. 1121
. 1122
. 1123
. 1127
. 1129
. 1130
. 1132
. 1135
. 1138
. 1141
. 1142
. 1145
. 1147
. 1152
. 1155
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1160
. 1161
. 1162
. 1163
. 1165
. 1166
. 1167
. 1168
xvi | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 44
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1170
. 1171
. 1172
. 1173
. 1176
. 1181
. 1186
Chapter 45
Chapter 46
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1189
. 1191
. 1192
. 1193
. 1194
. 1196
. 1199
. 1201
. 1208
. 1209
. 1210
. 1212
. 1213
. 1213
. 1214
. 1214
. 1215
. 1216
. 1219
. 1221
. 1222
. 1224
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1227
. 1229
. 1234
. 1242
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Contents | xvii
xviii
Projects
New Users
Time Required
20 minutes
Tutorial File
Used
This exercise explains the purpose and function of the Autodesk Inventor
project file (*.ipj file). You do not need to complete this tutorial to complete
any of the other tutorial exercises.
If you are working for a company that already uses Autodesk Inventor, the
chances are good the company already has one or more existing project files.
If so, consult the CAD Manager or a co-worker to determine the company
policy regarding project files. You may be able to set the proper project file
and move on to the other exercises.
This tutorial is intended to provide a "best practices" example in which a single
project file controls all the searchable directories. The single master project
file technique provides stability and simplicity. It also makes the data more
accessible to document control systems such as Vault or Productstream.
NOTE A master project file supports the use of other project files. You can create
multiple project files if they are needed for prototyping or other development
work. If multiple project files are required, they should be located in subfolders
beneath the master project folder for stability and simplicity.
Objectives
Learn about Project file options.
Prerequisites
Inventor is installed.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 3)
2 | Chapter 1 Projects
The Templates folder identifies where the program stores file templates.
The Content Center Files folder identifies the root folder for the Content
Library files of the project.
You create, modify, and manage your projects using the Projects editor.
You can access the Projects editor dialog box from Autodesk Inventor, or
externally from the Microsoft Windows Start menu.
Previous (page 3) | Next (page 4)
Understand Projects
All projects contain the following parameters:
Workspace location (or a workgroup location)
Project options
4 | Chapter 1 Projects
Examine a Project
When you install Autodesk Inventor, it creates a Default project, an iLogic
Samples project, and a tutorial_files project automatically.
Examine a simple project:
1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files.
2 Click
Manage Projects.
Examine a Project | 5
3 Click tutorial_files in the upper pane of the Projects editor dialog box.
The contents of the file display in the lower pane of the Projects editor.
6 | Chapter 1 Projects
Understand Workspaces
In addition to the default Folder Options and Options parameters, the
tutorial_files project contains only one other parameter, a workspace
location. It is the simplest type of project.
The workspace points to the folder where your tutorial exercise files are
installed.
When this project is active, the Open, Save, and Place Component dialog
boxes default to this location.
Only one workspace can be defined in a single-user project.
Select a Project
To select a project and make it the active project.
1 In the top pane of the Projects editor, locate the name of the project; in
this case, locate the tutorial_files project.
2 Double-click tutorial_files.
Understand Workspaces | 7
A check mark appears next to the project name, indicating that it is the
active project file.
In the lower pane, the workspace path is absolute and defined as "Location =
(wherever you installed Autodesk Inventor)\Inventor {version}\Tutorial Files\."
Previous (page 7) | Next (page 8)
8 | Chapter 1 Projects
2 Click
Open.
The Tutorial Files folder opens, and its files and subfolders are listed.
If you hover over the Workspace entry in the Open dialog box, the tooltip
indicates that the Tutorial Files folder is defined as your workspace.
In addition, any libraries and subfolders that you define are also accessible
here.
10 | Chapter 1 Projects
Manage Projects
You use the Projects editor to manage your designs.
You can create new projects as you need them, and modify existing projects
when paths change or new paths are required.
Place common search paths (such as library search paths) in a separate project
file. You can then specify this file as the included project file in your other
project files. All search paths in the included project file are added to the
current project file.
Manage Projects | 11
Use the Projects editor from Autodesk Inventor or from the Microsoft Windows
Start menu to maintain and manage your projects.
Create a Project
Next, we create a project.
1 Create a folder on your local hard drive in the My Documents area.
Name the new folder InventorMasterProject.
2 Locate the Tutorial Files folder in the Autodesk Inventor install
directory.
3 Copy the Arbor Press folder to the InventorMasterProject folder.
Notice that the Arbor Press folder contains two subfolders to further
organize the data files.
4 Start Autodesk Inventor in a blank document state.
12 | Chapter 1 Projects
5 If the Projects dialog box is not currently open, close any open files, and
then click
Manage Projects.
location, create a project file that does not list this directory as a project
library folder.
If you edit a file saved in an active library location, the following message
displays: Cannot modify the library file C:\My
Documents\InventorMasterProject\Library\<filename>.
TIP To create a separate folder for library files without limiting the edit
abilities, do not use the project to define the Library. Instead, create a library
folder with the required name nested under the project file folder.
5 Select Frequently Used Subfolders, and right-click to access the
context menu.
Use Add Path to add one directory folder at a time. You can provide
a unique shortcut name for each folder added.
Use Add Paths from File to specify another project file to add
paths.
Use Add Paths from Directory to add all subfolders beneath the
selected folder to the subfolder list.
6 Select Add Paths from Directory, and select the Arbor Press folder.
7 Click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box.
Notice that the subfolders located beneath the Arbor Press folder appear
in the Projects dialog box.
8 Click Save, and then click Done to close the Projects dialog box.
NOTE In the future, press Esc to exit any Add Path operation without
adding a path.
Previous (page 12) | Next (page 14)
Open.
14 | Chapter 1 Projects
3 The Components folder containing the arbor press part files opens.
4 To navigate back to the root of the workspace, click Workspace in the
upper-left panel.
Notice the Content Center Files folder is listed as an available Library
in the left panel.
5 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box.
Previous (page 13) | Next (page 15)
Control Projects
In the Projects Editor dialog box, use the right-click context menus in the
upper pane to:
Rename existing projects.
You can directly edit the various parameters in the current project using
context menus to add, change, and delete paths.
You can also change optional settings for a project, including the number of
file versions to store.
Previous (page 14) | Next (page 15)
File Versions
Each time you save an Autodesk Inventor file, the previous version of the file
is stored in an OldVersions folder under the folder containing the file.
You can specify how many versions of each file are stored in the OldVersions
folder.
1 Expand Options.
2 Select Old Versions To Keep On Save.
3 Click the Edit selected item button (on the right-hand portion of the
dialog box).
4 Enter the number of versions to keep.
Control Projects | 15
You can open an older version of a file as a read-only file. Alternatively, you
can restore an old version as the current version of the file. Before the
restoration of an old version, the file is saved as the most recent version in
the OldVersions folder.
NOTE Assembly files always use the current version of parts included in the
assembly. Old versions of assembly files do not retain information on the part and
subassembly versions that were in effect when you saved the assembly.
Previous (page 15) | Next (page 16)
When set to No, Autodesk Inventor uses its normal search process.
16 | Chapter 1 Projects
Summary
This tutorial introduced you to single-user project fundamentals including:
Understanding projects
18 | Chapter 1 Projects
Navigation Tools
ViewCube
SteeringWheel
Navigate in 3D space.
Category
New Users
Time Required
20 minutes
19
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Objectives
Demonstrate the View Cube and SteeringWheels commands using a
combination of text, images, and animations.
Prerequisites
Know how to open files.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
NOTE The ViewCube and SteeringWheels appear in several Autodesk
products. Some of the features and functions of these tools might not be
appropriate for a particular workflow.
Next (page 20)
The ViewCube
Provides labeled faces to indicate current view angle relative to the model
world.
Provides clickable edges (along with the clickable corners and faces).
Provides the ability to set the Front and Top views to user-defined views,
thereby also redefining the other orthographic views, along with the
isometric views. The redefined views are recognized by other environments
or applications such as drawings or DWF.
Provides options so that you can adjust the cube characteristics according
to your preferences.
The ViewCube | 21
Overview: SteeringWheels
SteeringWheels is a convenient onscreen pallet of familiar navigation
controls, as well as controls that may be new to you.
SteeringWheels provides:
Zoom Change the camera distance from the model. Zoom direction can
be reversed relative to mouse motion.
Look In Perspective mode, the ability to change your view angle without
changing camera position, like pivoting a camera in any direction around
a fixed point, or like moving your head from side to side or up and down.
SteeringWheels follows the cursor. You can access this pallet of tools
instantly, without having to move the cursor to an icon on the ribbon. Like
the ViewCube, you can turn SteeringWheels on and off through the
drop-down menu in the Navigate panel of the View tab. Also, like the
Switch Views
1 Click an edge to switch to an edge-on view.
2 Click a face to switch to an orthographic view.
3 In an orthographic view, the Z-rotation arrows are available and provide
a rotation axis normal to the screen. The axis passes through the
geometric center of the model. Click an arrow to rotate the model 90
degrees.
Also in orthographic view, the program shows arrows to select faces
adjacent to the displayed face.
Previous (page 23) | Next (page 23)
The Shadow
Notice that a shadow is adjacent to the bottom face. It always moves with the
bottom face to provide a constant, almost subliminal, indication of the Up
direction of the model.
Orbit
You can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cube
to adjust your view.
Unless you are an AutoCAD user, the term Orbit may be new to you. Prior
to Inventor 2009, all user interface labels and tooltips, along with Help
documentation, used the term Rotate. Though Rotate is descriptive of this
particular interaction with the model, it is not technically accurate. Every
view of the model is actually from the viewpoint of a mobile camera, as if you
are looking at the model through a camera. When you rotate a model, the
camera is actually orbiting the model.
Fortunately for veteran Autodesk Inventor users, the default behavior is the
same as it was in previous versions.
Previous (page 23) | Next (page 24)
Orbit
3 Position the cursor outside the reticle, adjacent to one of the horizontal
markers. Click and drag the cursor across the screen. The orbit is
constrained to the Up axis of the model.
Home View
The Home button appears when you pause the cursor over the ViewCube.
1 Click the Home button. The viewpoint returns to a predefined location.
NOTE In R2009 and later, the context menu option Isometric View (F6) has
been changed to Home View.
You can set any viewpointnot just an isometric viewas the Home
view.
2 Orbit the model to some arbitrary viewpoint.
3 Right-click the ViewCube, and then select Set Current View as
Home Fixed Distance.
The Home view is now the specified view.
Previous (page 24) | Next (page 25)
Front View
You can also set any viewpoint as the Front view.
1 Select any face on the ViewCube, other than the face currently labeled
as Front.
2 Right-click the ViewCube, and select Set Current View as Front.
This function also reorients all the other orthographic and isometric model
views, For example, the Back view must always be opposite the Front view.
Home View | 25
Notice that the view does not need to be orthographic. You can specify any
viewpoint to be the Front view.
To pick up model view redefinitions in a drawing, ensure that the From
Model option is selected in the Style and Standard Editor. To access to this
option:
1 Start a new drawing.
2 On the ribbon, select Manage tab Styles and Standards panel
Styles Editor.
3 In the Style and Standard Editor browser, select the relevant standard
under the Standard node.
4 Select the View Preferences tab.
5 Ensure From Model is selected on the Front View Plane drop-down
menu.
As suggested in the introduction, drawing views created after a model view
redefinition honor the redefined model view.
On the other hand, model view redefinition is not backward-associative.
Drawing views created before a model view is redefined do not update to
match the redefinition.
Close the Style and Standard editor.
Previous (page 25) | Next (page 26)
Up and Down
Just as it sounds, you can use the Up/Down control to translate the camera
up and down. Up/Down translates the camera along the top/bottom axis.
Previous (page 28) | Next (page 28)
Rewind
If you have ever wanted to save and quickly access views in a part document,
try using the Rewind control.
1 Press and hold the Rewind control. A set of thumbnails appear, almost
like a film strip, showing you a selectable history of model views.
2 Drag the cursor to the left across the thumbnails. The model view
seamlessly animates back through the preceding views.
3 Release the mouse button to select a view.
Notice that the selected view can be any intermediate view, not just
the views shown in the thumbnails. Previous views are stored only for
that session.
Previous (page 28) | Next (page 29)
Other Features
If you have multiple windows open, SteeringWheels passes seamlessly from
window to window.
As an alternative to right-clicking to bring up the SteeringWheel context
menu, you can click the context menu button to bring up the menu.
Mini Wheels
The full version of SteeringWheels displays by default, but you can specify
other full-size versions of SteeringWheels as well as miniature versions of
each wheel. To experiment with these versions, right-click the
SteeringWheels tool, and select a version from the menu. For example,
select Mini View Object Wheel to see a small version of the full
SteeringWheels.
Previous (page 29) | Next (page 30)
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Use the ViewCube to switch defined views.
Use SteeringWheels to orbit a model and redefine the orbit pivot point.
Summary | 31
32
Sketch Constraints
New Users
Time Required
25 minutes
33
sk1.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Understand sketch constraints to work effectively with Autodesk Inventor.
Objectives
Apply constraints.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view
tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and
extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 34)
Get Started
1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to open the sketch for edit.
2 To orient the view, click View Face from the navigation toolbar, and
click Sketch1 in the browser so the sketch is parallel to the screen.
The sketch used in this tutorial contains four straight line segments
drawn so the line endpoints are constrained to be coincident. Otherwise,
the geometry is unconstrained.
Get Started | 35
Drag Geometry
Move the endpoint of one of the lines:
1 Move your mouse cursor over the top-most endpoint.
2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then
drag the point up and toward the right.
3 Release the mouse button to select the new position.
Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position specified for
the endpoint.
Previous (page 34) | Next (page 37)
The program repositions all the selected geometry without changing the
size or angle of any of the line segments.
6 Click in your graphic window to cancel the selection of all four line
segments before proceeding to the next step.
Previous (page 37) | Next (page 41)
Notice that one end of the line remains fixed while the program
dynamically repositions the other. The attached segment also adjusts
length and angle to stay attached.
7 Click to select a new angle for your line segment and click Done to close
the Rotate dialog box.
Geometry.
3 Select the browser node Center Point to include the origin point as a
point in your sketch.
4 Click Sketch tab Constrain panel Coincident Constraint.
5 Select the lower endpoint of the left-most line, and then the projected
origin point.
Notice that two line segments adjust their length and angle to allow the
endpoint to become coincident with the origin point.
NOTE Do not be concerned if the shape of your geometry does not exactly
match the illustrations.
Previous (page 41) | Next (page 43)
Although the left line segment becomes parallel to the right line segment,
the length of the upper and lower lines changed.
Next, you apply dimensions which constrain your geometry to a specific size.
Previous (page 44) | Next (page 46)
Apply a Dimension
Use the General Dimension command in the sketch environment to place
linear and angular dimensions. What you select determines what type of
dimension you obtain. If you want to dimension the length of a line, you can
select the line. If you want to place a dimension between two pieces of sketch
geometry, you can select each piece of geometry.
1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Constrain panel Dimension.
TIP You can set an application option so you can edit dimensions during
placement. Each time you click to place a dimension, the Edit Dimension
dialog box appears automatically and you can specify the actual dimension
or equation. The option is called Edit dimension when created and
is located on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box.
Previous (page 45) | Next (page 47)
NOTE You can also delete dimensions. With no command active, right-click
the dimension and select Delete from the context menu. Alternatively,
select the dimension and then press the Delete key.
In the next steps, you explore which constraints you applied and ways to
delete constraints that you no longer need.
Previous (page 46) | Next (page 48)
Notice that icons appear near each piece of geometry with indications
of the applied constraints.
Previous (page 47) | Next (page 49)
Pause your mouse over the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of
the right-most vertical line segment.
Notice that the lines which are perpendicular highlight, as does the
perpendicular constraint icon. Using this technique you can understand the
network of constraints that govern the behavior of your sketch.
Previous (page 48) | Next (page 51)
Delete a Constraint
By right-clicking a displayed constraint icon, you can delete the constraint.
1 Right-click the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of the
right-most vertical line segment.
2 Select Delete to remove the perpendicular constraint between this line
and the horizontal lower line segment.
3 Click and drag the top-most endpoint to see how the geometry now
behaves.
Delete a Constraint | 51
Finally, right-click an empty area of your sketch, and select Hide All
Constraints to make the constraint icons invisible.
Previous (page 49) | Next (page 52)
Summary
In this tutorial, you explored:
Various ways that under-constrained geometry behaves during dynamic
dragging.
Deleting constraints.
Direct Manipulation
Category
New Users
Time Required
30 minutes
Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt
53
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Maximize your skill using Direct Manipulation to interact with models.
Direct Manipulation is a new user interface where you interact and modify a
model while viewing the changes in real time. The resulting interaction is
dynamic, visual, and predictable. You focus on the geometry in an in-canvas
display instead of interacting with user interface elements such as the ribbon,
browser, and a dialog box.
Objectives
Identify the various graphical elements of the Direct Manipulation
in-canvas display.
Prerequisites
See the Help topics "Getting Started", "Direct Manipulation", and Dynamic
Input for further information.
System Settings
On the ribbon Tools tab, Options panel, select Application Options and
click the Sketch tab to enable the following settings:
Edit dimension when created
NOTE The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment
images in this tutorial.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 55)
2 Click OK.
3 The Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile appears in the isometric Home
View (isometric orientation) as shown. Press F6 to restore the Home
View if your view is different from the image.
Take a moment to study the Model browser at the left side of the graphics
window. It displays both the part origin and the sole feature in the part,
Sketch1. Click the + button to the left of the Origin folder name to expand
the item. Notice that the center point of the part (X=0, Y=0, Z=0), the origin
planes, and origin axes are displayed in the browser. Each of the browser
elements highlights in the graphics window as you move your cursor over
them.
NOTE The Origin elements appear dimmed in the browser. Although their visibility
is turned off by default, they are still active. You can turn on the visibility by
right-clicking over any one of them and activating the corresponding Visibility
check box in the pop-up context menu. It is not necessary to turn them on for
this exercise, however.
Previous (page 53) | Next (page 56)
The value input box reports that a full 360 revolution will be performed
around the sketch axis you selected. It is the default condition for the Revolve
command and the graphical preview on your display screen reflects that.
However, you can enter any angular value in the value input box to create a
revolution other than a full 360.
As an alternative to entering an explicit angular value in the value input box,
you can also click the gold rotation arrow manipulator. Then dynamically
drag the sketch profile around the axis of revolution.
1 Try it now. Click the rotation arrow manipulator and drag the profile
around the axis. First drag in one direction, and then try dragging in the
opposite direction. As you drag the rotation arrow, observe the changing
angular values displaying in the value input box. Note also that the
graphical preview updates in real time to show the results of the Revolve
operation.
2 When you are finished experimenting with dynamic drag, direct your
attention to the Revolve mini-toolbar in the in-canvas display.
3 Starting at the upper-left, let us examine each of the buttons.
4 Now, select the Full option in the Extents button flyout and click the
green Ok button to complete the Revolve command.
5 Observe that the Revolution1 feature was added to the Model browser.
Click the + button to the left of the feature name to expand the item.
The feature has one child - the sketch from which it was created.
6 Move your cursor over both the Revolution1 feature name and
Sketch1 in the browser. The corresponding items highlight in the
graphics window as you do so.
2 Once again, direct your attention to the Model browser at the side of
the graphics window. The Origin folder should still be in an expanded
state. If not, click the + button to expand the part Origin folder.
3 As you did previously, move your cursor over the YZ Plane, the XZ
Plane, and the XY Plane in the browser. As each Origin plane
2 Select the top horizontal line and the arc representing the spherical
radius to project onto the sketch plane. Select the X axis from the
2 Left-click the point shown to begin the first point of the line. A green
dot appears to indicate that you have selected the precise endpoint of
the projected line. The Heads-Up Display (HUD) Pointer Input displays
3 Move your cursor to the left (180). End the first line segment by clicking
where the horizontal line intersects with the start of the spherical radius.
Do not be concerned with the displayed value in the value input box.
4 The first sketch line is now complete. The Line command can also be
used to draw an arc radius. For the starting point of the arc, click the
endpoint of the line you just drew. Press and hold the left mouse button
and drag your cursor to trace over a portion of the spherical radius.
5 The length of the arc segment is not important. Drag your cursor just
enough to approximate what you see in the image. Be sure to keep your
cursor on the spherical radius to ensure that the arc ending point is
coincident with the projected geometry. (A yellow dot at the end of the
cursor and a coincident constraint symbol appear when you are
coincident with the sketch geometry.) Click to set the ending point of
the arc.
6 You now use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to sketch
another line with a precise distance and angle. Still in the Line
command, pick the ending point of the arc you just completed and move
your cursor to the right. Two value input boxes appear near your cursor
indicating the length (distance) and angle of the sketch line under
construction. Notice that the first value input box is highlighted and
awaits your input. Enter 60 in the box for the line length and press the
Tab key to shift the input focus to the second value input box. Enter 0
for the line angle and press the Tab key again.
7 Observe the small lock icon within each value input box. They indicate
that the values you entered are locked (constrained) for both the distance
and angle of the line. Note also the two parallelism glyphs indicating
8 Press Enter to finish drawing the line. The dimensional values, called
persistent dimensions, are created and placed when Dynamic Input
is used to define sketch geometry.
9 Next, draw the final line segment back to the point at which you started.
When the green dot appears, click to complete the segment and close
the profile.
10 Finally, right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu, or
press the Esc key, to exit the Line command.
We will now create a vertical dimension to specify the width of the
profile.
11
12 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. (The endpoints appear
as red dots when you place your cursor over them.) Move your cursor
to the left and click to place the dimension.
13 Enter 9 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or press
Enter) to create the dimension.
14 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the
Dimension command.
Previous (page 64) | Next (page 69)
Or, right-click Work Plane1 in the Model browser and clear the
Visibility check mark.
NOTE The 60mm dimension has been moved and the angular dimension deleted
in the image to provide clarity.
You are now ready to mirror your new sketch about the X axis of the part.
2 Move your cursor to the upper left and outside the sketch to pick the
first point. Next, move your cursor in a diagonal direction to the lower
right to pick the second point. As you move your cursor, the window
graphically previews to help you determine the required extents of the
Mirror window.
3 Click the Mirror line button in the Mirror dialog box and select the X
axis which you projected in a previous step.
4 Click the Apply button in the Mirror dialog box to preview the results
of the mirror operation.
5 Click the Done button to mirror the sketch, close the Mirror dialog box,
and exit the Mirror command.
7 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish
the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view.
Previous (page 65) | Next (page 71)
3 After selecting the profiles, the in-canvas display appears in the graphics
window. The default option for the Extrude command is to perform a
Join operation. The graphical preview appearing on the screen displays
in green for a Join.
4 Click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut
option
5 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Direction button and select the
Direction 2 option
, if not already active. Observe that the
graphical preview changes color from green to red to indicate a Cut
operation. Note also that the gold distance arrow manipulator has
reversed position and now points in a negative direction into the screen.
6 Take a moment now and try dragging the distance arrow backward and
forward over the object. The red graphical preview shows you the material
to be removed during a Cut operation.
8 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout
and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude
command.
The new feature, Extrusion1, is added to the Model browser.
Edit Sketch
Create Sketch
7 Pick the approximate point shown in the image to place the lower-right
corner of the rectangle. Do not be concerned with the values displayed
.
8 Move your cursor to the upper left to activate the rectangle horizontal
and vertical value input boxes. The current input focus is in the value
input field representing the horizontal dimension. Enter 50 and press
Tab. The lock icon indicates that the horizontal dimension of the
rectangle is fully constrained.
9 Input focus is now shifted to the second value input field representing
the vertical dimension. Enter 25 and press Tab.
10 Press Enter to draw and dimension the rectangle. The rectangle is fully
dimensioned because Dynamic Input with persistent dimensions was
11 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the
Two Point Rectangle command.
NOTE To move a sketch dimension to a new location, select the dimension,
and press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the dimension. Release
the mouse button when the dimension is placed to your satisfaction.
The new feature, Sketch3, is added to the Model browser.
We now create a single vertical dimension to center the rectangle on the
flattened face.
12
13 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. Move your cursor to
the left and click to place the dimension.
14 Enter 6.71 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or
press Enter) to create the dimension.
16
17 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish
the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view.
Previous (page 71) | Next (page 79)
2 Starting from the left, the Sketch mini-toolbar offers the following four
commands:
Extrude
Revolve
Hole
Edit Sketch
3 Click the Extrude button and select the rectangle as the profile to
extrude. Be sure to pick inside the rectangle.
4 When the Extrude mini-toolbar appears, click the flyout arrow on the
Operation button and select the Cut option
5 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout
and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude
command.
The new feature, Extrusion2, is added to the Model browser.
Face fillets are created between two faces or face sets. The faces need not
share an edge. Any small edges and irregular geometry are blended over
by the fillet.
Full round fillets are variable-radius fillets that are tangent to three adjacent
faces or face sets. The center face set is replaced by a variable-radius fillet.
2 The mini-toolbar appears offering both Fillet (first button) and Chamfer
(second button) command options.
3 Click the Fillet button and the Fillet mini-toolbar appears.
NOTE While it is beyond the scope of this exercise to describe each of the
mini-toolbar components, you are encouraged to review the Fillet topic
in the Inventor Help.
4 For the purpose of this tutorial, we need only consider the following
four components of the mini-toolbar:
Value input box - used to enter a fillet radius in the value input
field.
Apply button - indicated by a green '+', the Apply button lets you
apply one or more edge fillets without exiting the Fillet command.
5 Try dragging the gold distance arrow manipulator forward and backward
over the circular edge. Observe how the fillet radius increases and
decreases in real time.
6 Drag the manipulator until 3.250 mm appears in the value input box,
or enter the value 3.25 from the keyboard.
7 Click the Ok button to create the fillet and exit the command.
The new feature, Fillet1 is added to the Model browser.
Previous (page 79) | Next (page 84)
command from the marking menu. The Hole dialog box appears in its
collapsed state in the graphics window.
2 Select the top face at the rear of the part. The Hole mini-toolbar
appears in the graphics window. If the mini-toolbar obscures the pick
location on the top face of the model, select the mini-toolbar by the
grip button just to the left of the value input box, and move it to a
different location.
3 Look closely at the point you picked on the top face. The ring
manipulator around the center of the hole represents the hole diameter.
Click the ring with your mouse and it will turn gold in color. Try dragging
the gold ring manipulator to increase and decrease the diameter of the
hole.
NOTE You may need to zoom up your display a bit to make the manipulators
easier to select.
4 The sphere manipulator at the center of the pick point represents the
center location of the hole. Click the sphere with your mouse and it will
turn gold in color, also. Try dragging the gold sphere manipulator to
place the hole location dynamically.
For this exercise, we will use precise linear placement by selecting the
appropriate edges and entering the required distances from each.
5 Click the inside edge of the rectangle.
6 Enter 5 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the horizontal
dimension.
7 Next, click the outside edge of the highlighted face.
8 Enter 19 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the vertical
dimension.
9 Using the Hole dialog box, enter the following values to create a M6x1
- 6H metric tapped hole with a thread depth of 6 mm:
Thread depth
6 mm
Drill Point
118 deg
Termination
Distance
Hole Type
Threaded
Thread Type
Size
Designation
M6x1
Class
6H
Direction
Right Hand
10 Click the OK button to close the dialog box, create the tapped hole, and
finish the command.
The new feature, Hole1, is added to the Model browser.
Previous (page 81) | Next (page 90)
2 Select the angled face on the top of the part. The Move Face Free Move
triad appears.
You can interactively position a face or feature by dragging the triad in
a planar move, axial move, or free movement. The selected area of the
triad controls the movement. The colors help you identify triad axes:
When you first activate the triad, its origin sphere is coincident with the
geometry you want to transform. Click a triad section or drag to indicate
the type of transform you want. As you select other parts of the triad,
you can drag or enter precise coordinates corresponding to your selection.
The triad is comprised of the following elements:
Rotational manipulators rotate the triad around the axis. Click the
red rotational manipulator to rotate in the YZ plane dynamically
around the X axis. Click the green rotational manipulator to rotate
dynamically in the XZ plane around the Y axis. Click the blue
rotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XY plane around
the Z axis.
In the next step, we rotate the angled face in the XZ plane using the
green rotational manipulator. It may be helpful to rotate the view a bit
to provide easier access to the manipulator.
3
Click the Free Orbit command in the Navigation Bar at the right
of the graphics window. The rotation symbol appears in the graphics
window with both vertical and horizontal axes. Click inside the rotation
symbol. Press and hold the left mouse button as you move your cursor
When you are satisfied with the new view, press the Esc key to exit the
Free Orbit command.
TIP You can quickly access the Free Orbit function in the middle of another
command by pressing and holding function key F4 as you rotate the view.
When the view is rotated to your satisfaction, release the function key to
resume the previous command. You can also use the ViewCube to orbit
the model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view.
4 Click the green rotational manipulator and drag to the right to see the
effects of a negative rotation. Drag to the left to view a positive rotation.
5 Enter 2 in the value input box and click the green Ok button to rotate
the face 2 in the positive direction.
The Move Face command terminates and the new feature, Move Face1,
is added to the Model browser.
6 Press F6 to restore the Home view.
7 Save and close the file. This concludes the Introduction to Direct
Manipulation tutorial.
Previous (page 84) | Next (page 94)
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Revolve and extrude profiles using Direct Manipulation.
What Next? In this exercise, the Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile was
provided for you. To learn how to create a part from scratch and gain further
experience with sketching, part modeling, and work feature commands, try
the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.
Previous (page 90)
Parts 1
New Users
Time Required
60 minutes
95
Tutorial File
Used
In this tutorial, you work with various commands and workflows in Inventor
to build 3D parts.
This tutorial exposes you to various feature creation commands and workflows
you can use when you create 3D parts. If the finished part is the correct size
and shape, your modeling effort is successful.
Objectives
Create a part from a sketch.
Prerequisites
Complete the Sketch Constraints and Introduction to Direct
Manipulation tutorials.
Axes - Select
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 97)
96 | Chapter 5 Parts 1
2 Click the metric folder to start a new metric part. Under the Part category,
98 | Chapter 5 Parts 1
11 To see the entire equation, right click in a blank area of the graphics
window. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, and
then choose Expression. Notice the variable names and formulas appear.
Each dimension is assigned a variable based on the order of creation. d0
is the first value assigned because 0 is the first integer. In this example,
d0 was renamed Width and is a driving dimension. The second
dimension retains the original variable name d1 and is driven by the
dimension named Width.
NOTE The order of creation has no impact on which dimension can be the
controlling dimension.
NOTE The marking menu appears near the area of the screen on which you
right-click. Use this technique to control where a marking menu appears.
Previous (page 95) | Next (page 100)
NOTE Variables names are case sensitive and no spaces are allowed in the
name.
3 Select Done when finished.
TIP You can use algebraic operators in the equation area or in the Edit
Dimension dialog box to create a mathematical formula. Incomplete or
invalid equations display in red.
After finishing the sketch, the view automatically rotates to the Home
(isometric) view.
6 Create the extrusion.
To begin:
Select the face to sketch on. When the mini-toolbar appears, click
the third button on the right labeled with the tooltip, Create
Sketch.
Select the face to sketch on, then right-click and select New Sketch
from the marking menu.
TIP The icons for 2D Sketch and 3D Sketch are similar. They provide two
different sketching environments. If you start a 3D sketch, perform an Undo
and start a new 2D Sketch.
On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Modify panel Offset.
3 Select one of the edges, then drag it to the inside, and click to place. All
edges highlight and drag. If all the edges do not highlight, right-click
and make sure Loop Select and Constrain Offset are checked in the
overflow menu, then retry the selection.
Enable Loop Select to allow all planar continuous sketch geometry
to be selected as a group. Disable to select individual edges.
10
the view slightly in 3D before selecting the hole on the part. You can
also select the hole directly in the Model browser.
IMPORTANT Do NOT select the extruded body, or it will be patterned with
the hole.
11 Pick the Direction 1 arrow, and then choose a horizontal edge to set
the direction. The edge you choose determines the initial direction.
For example, if you choose the lower model or sketch edge, the horizontal
pattern direction is to the left. If you choose the upper model or sketch
edge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the right.
Use the Flip direction arrow to reverse the direction. Set the
count to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension spacing
field. With the text highlighted, select the horizontal sketch dimension
to use the dimension value for the spacing. Pick the Direction 2 arrow,
and then pick a vertical model or sketch edge. Set the count to two, and
then highlight the text in the dimension field. Select the vertical
reference dimension to use the dimension value.
12 Click OK to create the pattern. After you create the pattern, right-click
Sketch2 in the Model browser, and turn off the sketch Visibility.
Previous (page 100) | Next (page 107)
Start the Line command and begin to sketch a shape. Start with
a vertical line from the midpoint of the projected geometry. A green dot
indicates the midpoint.
TIP An explicit horizontal line on the lower section of the sketch is not
required to create a closed shape. Inventor uses Coincident constraints to
determine closed boundaries. If the two vertical lines are attached to the
projected edge of the sketch with Coincident constraints, there is no need
to draw the line.
TIP
Finished shape -
Before we create a new unique part, we create the sketch to locate the tapped
hole on both parts.
1 Start a new sketch on the top face as shown in the following image.
TIP Use the ViewCube to navigate to the Top view.
2 Create and dimension a line 6 mm from the midpoint of the front edge.
Make sure it is either perpendicular to the front edge or parallel to a side
edge.
3 Finish the sketch.
5 Click
Cap Front
6 You are now working in the new file, and the origin file End Cap Back
has been closed.
We are now ready to add the unique features to End Cap Front.
Previous (page 107) | Next (page 115)
2 Select the far end of the 6-mm line for the hole center location. Set
the hole depth to 14 mm.
3 Set the hole type to tapped. Change the thread type to ANSI Metric
M Profile. Set the size to 5 and the designation to M5 x 0.8.
On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab Work
On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab Work
Features panel Plane command to display work plane options.
shown. Change the Angle in the value input box to 0, and then pick
the green check mark to create the work plane.
10
11 Set the hole diameter to 4mm. In the Termination drop down, select
To and then pick the work plane that passes through the tapped hole
as the termination location.
12 Click OK to finish the command and create the hole. If you edit the
sketch that locates the tapped hole, the work plane and the 4-mm hole
that terminates on the plane will reposition.
TIP The cutaway image was created by starting a sketch on the YZ Origin
plane, then choosing Slice Graphics from the right-click context menu.
It is not required for this exercise.
Previous (page 113) | Next (page 122)
4 Exit the sketch. The tapped hole, the work plane, work axis, and 4-mm
hole are updated.
5 Save the file and close it.
6 Open the file End Cap Back.
Previous (page 122) | Next (page 126)
Mirror a Feature
We now add a unique feature to the back cylinder cap. Use the Mirror
command to create an identical feature on the opposite side of the part.
Creating a feature and then mirroring it allows symmetrical features to be
controlled by the original feature. When you edit the first instance, the
mirrored feature automatically updates.
2 In the Hole dialog box, set the Placement to Concentric and the hole
type to Counterbore.
3 Click the Plane selection arrow in the dialog box, and then select the
front plane of the revolved shape. The hole is previewed and the select
arrow is moved to Concentric Reference.
4 On the model in the graphics window, choose the edge of the revolved
shape to define the concentric edge.
Set Size to 5.
8 Select the interior of the counterbored hole on the model to define the
To termination, and then click OK to create the hole.
9 Start a sketch on the side of the cylinder block shown in the following
image.
10
Place a Point, Center Point near the middle of the face, and
constrain it to be horizontal and vertical to the outside edges.
12
13 Set the hole type to Drilled, the hole diameter to 10 mm, and the
hole depth to 10 mm.
14 Click OK to create the hole.
15
16 The feature selection arrow is active. Select the inside of the hole you
just created to add it to the mirror.
17 Change the selection type to Mirror Plane. You can do it in the dialog
box, or you can right-click and choose Continue from the pop-up
context menu.
18 In the Model browser, under the Origin folder, pick YZ plane to define
the mirror plane.
Summary
Used the dimension and constraint commands to control the size and
behavior of the sketch geometry.
What Next? - This tutorial introduced you to basic part modeling commands.
To learn about additional part modeling techniques, such as the use of work
features, see the Parts 2 tutorial.
Previous (page 126)
Summary | 135
136
Parts 2
New Users
Time Required
90 minutes
137
In this tutorial, you build a clamp mounting base using sketch geometry and
common construction techniques.
Objectives
Create a work plane that bisects the part to mirror symmetrical features.
Prerequisites
Complete the Sketch Constraints, Introduction to Direct
Manipulation, and Parts 1 tutorials.
Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab:
Apply driven dimension - Select
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 138)
2 Create and dimension the sketch profile geometry as shown. You do not
have to draw the bottom horizontal line if you connect the line endpoints
to the projected geometry. As you dimension the profile, keep in mind
that the 53 mm dimension is from the bottom projected edge as shown
in the image.
TIP The default direction for extrude/join is away from existing material.
The default direction for extrude/cut is towards existing material. It is good
idea to view a model in a 3D view before you extrude a profile to visualize
the direction. If you make a mistake and extrude a profile to the wrong side,
use Edit Feature and flip the direction.
NOTE The initial size of a work plane is determined by the size of the existing
features. To resize a work plane, first select the corner, then drag the corner
when the resize symbol appears.
Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion, the fillet, and
the through hole as the features to mirror.
TIP You can select the features on the part or in the Model browser.
3 When you finish selecting the features, choose the Mirror Plane
selection arrow in the dialog box. You can also right-click and choose
Continue from the context menu to change the selection arrow. Select
the work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.
Click the OK button to create the mirrored features and terminate the
Mirror command.
5 Select the center work plane, and drag the new work plane towards you
using the distance arrow manipulator. The Offset value input box
displays with a numeric value in it as you drag (if not, clear all selections
and restart the command, then try again).
6 Enter 30 mm in the Offset value input box to specify the exact distance
from the center plane.
7 Click the green check mark to finish the command.
Start a new sketch on the offset work plane. (Select the edge of
the work plane and click Create Sketch from the contextual
mini-toolbar.)
NOTE When you select a work plane for a new sketch, no geometry is
projected to lock the sketch to the part. Project model edges to obtain
geometry for connecting the sketch.
10
11
12
14
We now create two chamfers on the front of the base to create a smaller
footprint for the front of the base. To determine the chamfer distance,
we use the Measure Distance command to extract the distance between
the two planes.
15
16
18 Click the green Apply button (+) to create the chamfer and stay in the
Chamfer command. Select the opposite outside edge to create the
second chamfer. Reverse the input values, or use the flip direction
button to achieve the desired results.
In the next exercise, we create a tapped hole for a set screw on a curved face.
To do this, we create a work plane that is tangent to the curve and parallel to
the base.
Previous (page 140) | Next (page 155)
NOTE As you become a more advanced user, you might prefer to control
globally the visibility of Work Geometry, Sketches, and more by using an
Object Visibility filter in the View tab. If you switch the visibility off
using these controls, right-click a work plane, other work feature, or sketch
and note that the visibility is enabled but the feature is off. To enable it,
switch the visibility to on in the Object Visibility area.
Start the Line command, and draw a line from the midpoint of
one line to the midpoint of the other line. Repeat this process for other
tab.
9 Select the Tapped Hole option. Set the Thread Type to ANSI Metric
M Profile, the Size to 6, and the Designation to M6x1.
Add a 33-mm dimension from the front edge of the part to one
of the center points.
10
11
12
13
14
Start the Hole command. Pick the endpoint of the line to specify
the hole location.
15 Select the counterbore hole with the clearance hole option as shown in
the following image. The system determines the proper counterbore size
for the fastener you specify.
16 Select the fastener parameters listed in the image, and then click OK to
create the hole.
17 Save the file.
You have successfully completed this exercise!
Previous (page 155) | Next (page 164)
Summary
The completed part with all work features turned off.
You used the mirror command to duplicate symmetrical features, and projected
geometry from existing features to a sketch.
Previous (page 160)
Summary | 165
166
Assemblies
167
New Users
Time Required
60 minutes
Tutorial Files
Used
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
An assembly is a collection of components constrained to each other. This
exercise introduces workflows you can use to insert and precisely position
components relative to each other.
Objectives
The goal of the tutorial is to introduce techniques you can use to position and
analyze the movement of components. Some of the topics covered are:
Assembly constraints
Contact sets
Flexible assemblies
Analyze interference
Insert components
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various
view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching
and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 170)
3 While still in the the Place Component command, move the cursor
over the edge of the sketch circle.
In the graphics window:
When the axis displays, select the circle, as shown in the following image.
A mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphics
window.
4 To select an axis, move the cursor over the inside of the hole on the
base. When the axis preview displays, select inside the hole, as shown
in the following image. Do not select the edge of the hole when a green
dot appears. The dot is a point constraint, and does not result in an axis
to axis constraint.
The copy of the Clamp Sketch is attached to the Cylinder Base, and the
mini-toolbar moves to the area where you clicked.
5 Click OK to create the constraint.
Hold the left mouse button down as you select the 2D sketch, and then
push or pull on the geometry. The movement is limited to the axis you
defined.
6 In the browser, under Clamp Sketch, expand the Origin folder,
right-click the XY Plane, and turn on Visibility
7 Start the Assemble command. The mini-toolbar displays in the upper
left-hand corner of the graphics window.
8 On the clamp sketch, select the XY Plane to satisfy the first pick.
9 Select the work plane in the center of the base, as shown in the following
image.
11 Click the Clamp Sketch, and hold the left mouse button down. Drag the
2D sketch. The part still has one degree of rotational freedom. All
ungrounded components initially have six degrees of freedom: three
translational (linear X, Y, and Z), and three rotational (rotational X,Y,
and Z).
12 Click View tab Visibility panel Degrees of Freedom. A
rotational arrow on the Clamp Sketch indicates the part still has
rotational freedom. Select the Degrees of Freedom command again
to turn it off.
13 Save the file as Cylinder_Main.iam.
Previous (page 170) | Next (page 176)
Piston
5 Push and pull on the piston shaft. The piston body movement is limited
by the physical contact with the front and back cylinder heads.
NOTE Rapid mouse movement allows the piston to pass through the cylinder
cover bodies. This intentional behavior enables you to move contact set
members in or out of a closed body.
6 Pull the piston to the end of its stroke. In the Interference panel, click
Activate Contact Solver again to deactivate it.
7 Right-click the Cylinder Body and clear Enabled to make it easier to
select internal parts.
When you turn off Enabled, a component displays transparently for
reference, and you cannot select it. A component that is not enabled
appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, right-click the
component in the browser, and click Enabled.
8 Start the Constraint command. In the dialog box, do not change any
settings.
9 Click the end face of the Cylinder Head Cover- Back, as shown in the
following image.
10 Rotate the assembly or use Select Other to select the back face of the
Piston, as shown in the previous image.
11 Click More, and specify the following:
Maximum: 35mm
Minimum: 0
12 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box.
Drag the piston rod. The piston stops at either end.
13 In the browser, right-click the cylinder body and select Enabled.
Experiment with Limits settings to change the range of motion. In the browser,
edit the constraint. Expand the Piston, right-click the last Mate constraint,
and select Edit. If you click Use Offset As The Resting Position, you can enter
a default value for the piston position. If you drag the piston and let go, it
snaps back to the resting position.
Previous (page 171) | Next (page 179)
Click and drag the assembly icon from the browser to the
Cylinder_Main window. The subassembly is inserted in the main
assembly without using the Place Component command.
If the subassembly turns inside-out, drag it toward the back of the base
to correct the orientation as shown in the following image. The
constraints you applied limit the movement.
15 Drag the 2D sketch part to check the motion of your digital prototype.
1 Right-click the part Clamp Sketch in the browser and select Edit from
the pop-up context menu, or right-click the 2D sketch in the graphics
window and select Edit Component from the marking menu. You can
also double-click the sketch or the part file in the browser to start an
edit-in-place operation. Do not choose Open; if you do, the part file
opens in a separate window.
The inactive assembly components appear transparent.
3 To remove material from the solid to allow clearance for the piston, start
a new 2D sketch on the front face of the clamp as shown in the
following image.
4 Project the geometry at the top of the extrusion to the sketch, as shown
in the following image.
5 Sketch a rectangle that is coincident with the projected line, as shown
in the following image.
6 Create a vertical constraint between the two edges indicated.
NOTE If your geometry does not match the following image after applying
the constraint, undo and apply a horizontal constraint.
7 Add a 16-mm horizontal dimension and a 3-mm vertical dimension,
as shown in the following image.
9 Start the Extrude command. Cut the profile through the part. Use the
All option.
11
14
3 Right-click, then choose Repeat Place and place one copy of Short
Shaft.ipt. Right-click and select Done when finished.
9 Select the planar face of the base mounting tab first, and then select the
planar face at the end of the long shaft. Enter 5 mm for the offset value.
Notice that the face selection color matches the color of the selection
arrow order. The first selection is blue and the second selection is green.
This can help you troubleshoot constraints as you use Autodesk Inventor.
NOTE If you pick the faces in the reverse order, enter a value of -5 mm.
10 Select Apply to place the constraint and stay in the dialog box to place
another Mate/Flush constraint.
11 Pick the planar face of the clamp, and then pick the planar face at the
end of the short shaft. Enter an offset value of 4mm, and then click OK
to finish the command.
The long and short shafts should appear symmetrically constrained as
shown in the following image. The shafts are still free to rotate, but the
constraints that fix their position relative to the other components are
in place.
In the next segment, we will place and position the two cylindrical lock pins.
We will position them in the hole so the flat surface of the pin faces the tapped
hole. In this case, we do not want the cylinder to rotate.
1 Start the Place Component command, and place two instances of
Lock Pin.ipt.
13 Click OK to apply the constraint and exit the dialog box. The lock pins
are fully constrained in alignment with the tapped holes.
14 Save the file.
In the following image depicting the Cylinder Base, Enabled is toggled off,
while Visibility is not. If a component is not enabled, it remains visible in
a transparent state, but it is not selectable. A component that is not enabled
appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, select the component
in the browser, and choose Enabled in the context menu.
finish the assembly is furnished in the tutorial directory. The steps listed in
the following section do not detail the workflow to place the circlips without
Content Center.
The Content Center allows you to place a component, adjust the size to match
the target, and constrain it in a few picks. The target edge for the circlip we
will place in the next section is the inside edge noted in the following image.
4 Select ANSI B 27.7M in the dialog box, and then choose OK. A preview
of the component appears in the graphics window attached to the cursor.
The question mark in the preview image indicates that the clip can be
automatically resized using AutoDrop.
5 Move your cursor over the inside edge of the groove, and wait for the
component to resize automatically. Click the edge when the component
is the proper size, and then click the check mark in the AutoDrop dialog
box to place and constrain the component.
6 Repeat to place the remaining circlips. Choose Done from the context
menu when finished. There should be four instances of ANSI B 27.7N
3AMI-7 in the browser.
7 Start the Place Component command.
8 Place two copies of 6mm SHCS.ipt in the assembly.
9 Rotate the components, if necessary, to position the hex opening up as
shown in the following image.
Summary
What Next? Try the Drawings tutorial to learn how to document parts and
assemblies using the drafting and view layout commands.
Previous (page 198)
Summary | 205
206
Drawings
New Users
Time Required
45 minutes
Tutorial Files
Used
hinge.idw
hinge.ipt
Cylinder Clamp.idw
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
It is likely that Archimedes created engineering drawings as early as 260 BC and
da Vinci documented his designs in the 1500s using drawings. Although the
common blueprint (in use since 1842) has faded from use, 3D digital prototypes
are still documented using drawings. Often these drawings are for those people
responsible for manufacturing. Digital drawing files today follow the standards
defined for paper drawings. The creation of a design drawing remains the
ultimate goal for a majority of engineers and designers.
Prerequisites
Complete the Parts 2and Assemblies tutorials.
207
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 208)
Get Started
1 Open hinge.idw,located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp.
This file contains a simple, two sheet drawing that you can refer to during
the tutorial. Sheet:1 of the drawing contains four views of the part you
will detail during the first part of this tutorial. Sheet:2 shows how the
drawing would look after the addition of a section view, dimensions,
and annotation.
2 To view Sheet:2, double-click the Sheet:2 node in the browser.
NOTE Although you can add sheets to any drawing you create, you do not typically
add sheets containing the same views shown on other sheets. The second sheet
in the supplied drawing is simply an easy way to reference incremental progress
for this tutorial.
You can leave this drawing open as you continue with the tutorial.
In the next several steps, you will select a template to begin a new drawing
and add front, left-side, top and isometric views to the drawing sheet.
Previous (page 207) | Next (page 209)
Create a Drawing
1 Click New on the Application Menu.
2 Click the Metric tab, and then select ISO.idw.
3 Click OK.
View Projection
After you place a base view, the Place Views tab Create panel
Projected
1 Click below your front view to place a top view. Notice that a temporary
rectangle is placed, indicating the intended location of the new view.
2 Click to the right of your front view to place a left side view. Another
temporary rectangle is placed.
3 Click below your front view and to the right of your top view. A
temporary rectangle is placed for an isometric view.
4 Right click, and select Create. The three projected views that you
positioned are now created.
NOTE The ISO drafting standard specifies first-angle projection. The ANSI drafting
standard specifies third-angle projection. Views are projected according to the
standard specified by the template used to create drawings. Autodesk Inventor
supplies templates for standards accepted world-wide. The supplied standards can
be modified to suit your requirements.
Approximate layout of current drawing sheet with one base view and three
projected views. Moving views is easy, if necessary. Just click and drag a
drawing view while the red dotted view boundary displays. Dependent views
will position relative to the parent view.
At this point, you would likely begin adding dimensions to a simple part.
However, for this part, add a section view.
Previous (page 209) | Next (page 212)
.
The Status Bar at the bottom left of the display screen prompts you
to: Select a view or view sketch.
2 Click the left side view located to the right of the front or base view on
your drawing sheet.
You are prompted to enter the endpoints of the section line. Draw a
vertical line that starts above the view geometry, extends below the view
geometry, and passes through the middle of the part.
3 To find the middle of the part, slowly move your cursor over the top-most
line in the center portion of the part. When you reach the middle of
that line, the cursor displays a green ball. Do not click yet!
As you move upwards, notice the dotted line extending from your cursor
to the middle of the part. This dotted line lets you know that you are
aligned with the midpoint of the line that was located under the green
ball. If you move too far to the right or the left as you move upwards,
you are no longer aligned to that point, and the dotted line disappears.
5 With the dotted vertical line visible, click to select the top-most point
of the section line.
6 Move your cursor straight down below the view. Your cursor indicates
that the line is perpendicular to the part edge.
7 While the perpendicular icon displays next to your cursor, click to select
the end point of the section line.
8 Right-click, and select Continue. The Section View dialog box appears
offering various options for defining, identifying, and scaling the section
view. For this exercise, accept the default settings.
9 Move your cursor to the left of the front view, and click to place the
section view and close the Section View dialog box.
During the creation of a section view, you can use Inventor ability to
infer geometric relationships while you sketch your section line. In this
example, you used a single, straight line. In other more complex cases,
you will use a multi-segment line that passes through key points of
multiple features.
.
2 Move your cursor over the center of the upper left hole in the section
view. When the green-filled circle appears, indicating that you are directly
over the center point, click to select the first point of your centerline.
TIP After clicking on the Centerline command, you can optionally click
to select the circle first. You can then more easily select the circle center with
a second click.
3 Move your mouse to the right until you are over the center of the
upper-right hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears,
click to select the endpoint of your centerline.
6 Repeat steps 2-5 to place a similar centerline between these same two
holes in the front view.
8 Move your cursor over the center of the cylindrical feature in the lower
right of the section view. When the green-filled circle appears (to indicate
that you are directly over the center point) click to place a center mark.
9 Repeat the previous step to place a center mark on the inside cylindrical
radius and on these same locations in the front view.
Place Dimensions
NOTE The following steps assume that you canceled the Edit dimension when
created selection on the Drawing tab of the Application Options dialog box
as instructed in the Prerequisites for this tutorial. If you did not, you will see an
Edit dialog box displayed after clicking to place each dimension. You can continue
this tutorial without changing the default settings by always clicking OK when
this dialog box displays. However, we recommend that you change the default.
1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Dimension panel
Dimension
2 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark
on the left-most hole in the section view.
3 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,
click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of
your dimension.
4 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark
on the right-most hole in the section view.
5 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,
click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the right extent of
your dimension.
6 Notice that as you move your cursor, the dimension extension lines
adjust. Click to position your dimension.
8 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,
click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of
your dimension.
9 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical line
representing the cut material.
10 To select the right extent of your dimension, click when the line
highlights and the green-filled circle appears.
11 Move your cursor to select a position, and then click to place the 16-mm
dimension.
3 Move your cursor over the bottom horizontal line. When the line
highlights, click to select the second side of the angle that you want to
dimension. Notice that the icon near the cursor indicates that your
selection will create an angle dimension.
3 Move your cursor over the left-most arc in the front view. Move your
cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears at the 270-degree
position. It indicates that you located the left-most quadrant key point.
Click to select the left-most point of what will be an overall reference
dimension.
CAUTION: The midpoint of the arc segment also displays a green-filled
circle at approximately 290 degrees. Selecting the arc segment midpoint
will not produce the appropriate dimension.
4 Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Move your
cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears to indicate that
you located the right-most quadrant key point. Click to select the
right-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension.
TIP Dimensions, centerlines, and center marks can also be placed for holes
and other features in isometric views.
Previous (page 226) | Next (page 231)
and Thread
2 Move your cursor near the 10 oclock position of the left-most hole in
your front view, and click to select the arrow location of your hole call
out.
3 Drag your cursor to position the leader and dimension for your hole
callout. Click to finalize the placement.
Your drawing should now appear like Sheet:2 on the previously opened
hinge.idw. Before you continue by working within a partially complete
assembly drawing, save your drawing.
4 With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application
menu.
5 Type a name for your drawing in the File name field of the Save as
dialog box.
Click the selection arrow on the Save as type field on the Save As dialog
box.
You may want to change the name of the saved drawing or the location
where you will save DWG files, but for this tutorial, simply click Save.
7 From the Application Menu, click Close All.
3 In the Parts List dialog box, select Parts Only from the BOM View
drop-down list control in the BOM Settings and Properties area.
4 Click OK in the Parts List dialog box.
A rectangle the size of the parts list appears attached to your cursor.
You are now ready to move the parts list to a position on your drawing
sheet.
5 Move the parts list so that it aligns with the upper left of the drawing
border.
Notice that when your cursor is over the drawing border, an icon appears
indicating the connection point for the parts list.
6 Click to accept the position of the parts list on your drawing sheet.
Each item in the assembly is given a sequential item number in the parts
list. You will now add balloons which use these item numbers.
Previous (page 233) | Next (page 238)
Add Balloons
8 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab Table panel, and then click the
drop-down menu below Balloon.
down and to the right. The pink rectangle should cover all the view
geometry.
13 Select the Around option in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon
dialog box.
14 Enter a value of 5 mm in the Offset Spacing field in the Auto Balloon
dialog box.
8 Click Select Placement in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon
dialog box.
9 Move your cursor into the drawing sheet. As you move your cursor, the
balloons arrange themselves closer or farther away from the view center.
Vertical rows move based on the horizontal position of the cursor relative
to the view center. Horizontal rows move based on the vertical position
of the cursor relative to the view center. The following illustration shows
four possible balloon positions using the Around option.
10 Move your cursor to a position that most closely resembles the display
in the lower-right quadrant of the image shown above. When your
balloon spacing appears similar, click to display the balloon arrows.
11 Click OK in the Auto Balloon dialog box to accept and place the balloons
and arrows.
Previous (page 234) | Next (page 242)
2 When the move symbol appears next to the cursor, click and drag the
location of the arrowhead point to the corner of the base closest to the
balloon.
3 When the lines representing the bottom and side of the base highlight
and the connection point icon appears next to your cursor, release your
mouse button to select the new position for the arrowhead point.
Next, you will place a few example notes.
Previous (page 242) | Next (page 246)
Place Notes
Every drawing contains text and annotation. This text may be attached to
drawing geometry with an arrow leader or contained within a specific area of
a title block or revision table. It can be a lengthy set of notes.
To place text:
NOTE For smaller amounts of text, your initial rectangle can be smaller. The
size of the text boundary can be adjusted at any time after placement so
getting it exactly correct is not critical.
When you release the mouse button, the Format Text dialog box displays.
In addition to some text formatting options, this dialog box contains a
large text entry field located along the bottom of the dialog box. For
many general notes, you can accept the text formatting defaults (which
are specified by the active style for your drawing).
3 Enter text in the text entry field. Type NOTES:, then press Enter and
continue to type 1. This is a note. Press Enter again and continue
to type 2. This is another note.
4 Click OK to place the text you typed in the text entry field on the
drawing sheet, within the area specified by your rectangle.
The text highlights and displays edit handles (green-filled circles). You
can drag the entire text block to a new location or move your cursor
over one of the eight edit handles to resize the text block boundaries.
7 With the text selected, right-click and select Edit Text from the context
menu. The Format Text dialog box opens with the selected text in the
entry field. You can highlight individual words and apply formatting
(bold, italic, underline) or change font or size.
8 Click Save to save the Cylinder Clamp drawing.
NOTE After clicking Save, you may be presented with the Save dialog box
prompting you with: Do you want to save changes to Cylinder
Clamp.idw and its dependents? You can click the Yes to All button
to save all the files associated with the assembly, or click No to All if you
wish to save none. Click the OK button to save only the files changed in
this exercise and close the dialog box.
Congratulations! You have completed the Drawings tutorial. A brief summary
follows.
Summary
The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment contains a collection of
commands most of which were not discussed in this tutorial. Knowing how
to use the fundamental methods to create basic drawings provides you with
a foundation to explore the use of these other commands. The basic procedures
covered in this tutorial include:
Projected and section view creation
Basic dimensioning
Summary | 249
250
Open a drawing and modify the drawing styles for dimensions. Apply the styles
to dimensions and modify the display of hatch patterns.
Category
New Users
Time Required
45 minutes
251
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
A drawing communicates a design, and must do so in a way that other people
can understand. The drawings from every company follow some combination
of rules from national, industry, or internal standards.
In this tutorial, you change the style of the open drawing and load information
from the style library. The project file references the style library that contains
the data to load into the drawing.
Prerequisites
Complete the Drawings tutorial.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 252)
Manage Projects.
In the lower pane of the Projects dialog box, confirm that the Use
Style Library setting is Read-Only.
If it is set to Read-Write, right-click the setting, and select Read-Only.
Then click Save.
Annotation Styles
Drawing styles control the appearance of drawing annotations. The default
styles delivered with Inventor comply with national and international
standards such as ANSI, ISO, and GB. You can modify the styles to meet the
requirements of your company. For example, if you have a text style that uses
a large font, you can use that style to override the appearance of notes.
This drawing was created using the ISO standard. Although most of the
annotations follow the standard, some changes are required. In this exercise,
you create a dimension style that uses a period instead of a comma for the
decimal marker.
6 Click Save.
NOTE Each style is a separate collection of settings. Save changes before
you switch to a different style.
Previous (page 252) | Next (page 255)
1 Expand the Object Defaults node and select Object Defaults (ISO).
Click New, and in Name,enter Modified Object Defaults (ISO). Clear
Add to Standard.
NOTE The Add to Standard behavior for object default styles differs from
annotation styles. If Add to Standard is selected, the new object default
becomes active for the standard.
2 Set the filter to Dimension Objects.
3 Change the Object Style for all dimension types that use the Default
(ISO) to Modified (ISO), as shown in the following image.
4 Click Save. Expand the Standard node, select Default Standard (ISO),
and create a standard named Modified Standard (ISO).
On the Available Styles tab, select Dimension Modified (ISO)
style.
On the Object Defaults tab, set Active Object Defaults to Modified
Object Defaults (ISO). Click Save, and double-click Modified
Standard (ISO).
The standard name changes to bold type to indicate it is active.
5 Click Done.
Newly created dimensions use the Modified Standard (ISO).
TIP To update existing dimensions, select the dimensions in the graphic window.
Then on the ribbon, select Modified Standard (ISO) from the Style list on
the Annotate tab Format panel.
5 On the Annotate tab Format panel Style List, click ModifiedNo Trailing Zeros (ISO).
Hatch Styles
Hatch patterns are used in section views, and to fill in the profiles in sketches.
Most standards specify the use of a single hatch pattern, and the angle of the
pattern is automatically changed on individual parts in assembly section views.
Some companies use different hatch patterns for different materials to help
differentiate them. In this exercise, you learn how to map hatch patterns to
materials, import a custom hatch pattern, and override the appearance of a
hatch pattern.
1 Zoom into view A-A. Since it is a view of a single part, all profiles have
the same hatch pattern.
2 On the Manage tab, click Styles and Standards group Styles
Editor. Expand the Standard node and select Modified Standard
(ISO).
3 Click the Material Hatch Pattern Defaults tab. The default hatch
pattern is set to ANSI 31, and no materials are listed. Click the From
Style Library icon to import the materials from the style library. All
materials are listed, and they are all mapped to the default hatch pattern.
NOTE If materials do not display, confirm that the style library setting in the
project is Read Only.
Scroll down to Steel, Mild and click the hatch pattern. The drop-down
menu lists ANSI 31, several ISO hatch patterns, and Other .
4 Click Other... to display the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box. This dialog
box controls which hatch patterns are available in the drawing. Select
ANSI 32 and click OK.
The ANSI 32 steel hatch pattern is now available, but it is not set as the
default hatch pattern for the Steel, Mild material. Click the hatch pattern
dropdown menu again, and select ANSI 32. Click Save, and Done.
Even though we set ANSI 32 as the default hatch pattern, the section
view does not update. Once you map hatch patterns to materials, new
section views automatically use those patterns. For existing views, Edit
the pattern and set the By Material option.
Right-click the pattern, and select Pattern By Material
The section view updates to use the ANSI 32 hatch pattern, as shown in
the following image.
The spacing on the hatch pattern is too close for this part cross-section.
5 Right-click on the pattern and select Edit .
By Material is selected and Pattern is disabled.
Change the Scale to 2, and click OK.
6
Previous (page 259) | Next (page 265)
NOTE Note If you do not select the view before you create the sketch, the
sketch is created on the sheet instead of the view. You cannot project view
geometry into a sheet sketch.
Summary
Overriding styles.
Summary | 267
268
10
iLogic Basics
New Users
269
Time Required
40 minutes
bracket_no_rules.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
iLogic extends the computational capabilities within Autodesk Inventor to
include rules. These rules work with the parameter update mechanism of
Autodesk Inventor and allow you to include much more sophisticated design
intent into your models.
In traditional parametric modeling, dimensional parameters drive geometry.
Parameter values can be input directly by the user, or they can result from
fixed equations involving other parameters or even linked spreadsheet values.
Using rules in a parametric model allows for conditionally defined equations.
Conditional equations can involve all aspects of the design. Equations or
relationships can be defined between the parameters, properties, attributes,
features, components, or any other aspect of the design. Defining the
relationships between all objects in a design makes it possible to update the
model completely, correctly, and automatically when input parameter values
are changed.
Objectives
Become familiar with important iLogic concepts.
Create rules and parameters that control the modeling of a simple part.
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling
functionality and concepts.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 271)
3 Use the Save As command to save this document as a new file named
bracket.ipt. This open document is your working file for the tutorial.
5 In the Add New Items field at the top of the dialog box, enter base,
flange, and none. Make sure to press Enter after each item to place it
on its own line.
6 Click Add to transfer the new items to the Value field at the bottom
of the dialog box.
(1) Enter your items here. (2) Click Add. (3) Observe items added as values.
7 Click OK to accept these values and close the Value List Editor dialog
box.
In the Equation cell of the holes parameter, click the drop-down arrow
to see the three string values you added.
8 Select the flange choice. Notice that as you change the value of the
hole parameter to flange, it also changes in the Equation field.
9 Select Key checkbox of this parameter to make it a Key parameter.
Previous (page 272) | Next (page 274)
4 Select the Key check box to make the chamfer parameter a Key
parameter.
5 Click Done to close the Parameter dialog box and complete the parameter
creation process.
Previous (page 272) | Next (page 275)
base_hole_width_loc
base_hole_dia
flange_hole_dia
flange_hole_length_loc
flange_hole_width_loc
Rule Editor
1
Rule.
2 Enter Modify_Feature in the Name field of the Rule Name dialog box,
and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box.
The Edit Rule dialog box is the heart of the iLogic functionality. You use
this dialog box to create and edit iLogic rules.
3 Select the Model tab. The top left panel of this window includes a view
of the Model tree. Click the Model Parameters node in the tree. Notice
that the top right panel now lists only the Model parameters.
To see other sets of parameters, you can click the User Parameters
node in the model tree to display only the manually created parameters.
You write rules in the rule text area, which is located in the bottom panel
of the Edit Rule dialog box. You can enter Rule keywords by typing them
directly into the text entry field. Or, you can select generic statements
from the toolbar above the field and then editing the statements.
Our new rule turns on (or off) the base hole, the flange hole, or both.
In a previous lesson, we created a multi-value parameter named holes.
We assigned three values to this parameter labeled base, flange and
none. The rule turns on the flange hole when flange value is selected.
Choosing base turns on the base hole, and a value of none turns off
both holes
2 Click the Model tab at the top of the Edit Rule dialog box, and click
flange_hole in the Model tree.
3 Click the Names tab in the top right corner of the dialog box, and notice
that flange_hole now appears here.
4 Highlight featurename in the rule text, and then double-click
flange_hole in the Names tab to replace featurename with
flange_hole.
(1) Highlight generic text. (2) Double-click name to replace highlighted text.
= True
False
= False
True
4 Add another ElseIf statement, and use the same copy and paste method
to create the third part of this rule, where no holes are required. Modify
the newly pasted text to suppress both hole features when the holes
parameter is set to none.
5 Finish the statement by typing End If (or clicking the corresponding
keyword button).
The rule is complete.
= True
False
= False
True
Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = False
Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = False
End If
6 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box.
If there are no mistakes, the dialog box closes without an error message.
An icon representing the new rule appears in the Rule Browser.
The Rule Browser provides a way for you to see the rules in the current
model. We explore the Rule Browser further later in this tutorial.
4 Click any other cell and observe the bracket. The only hole shown is the
flange hole.
5 Change the multi-value selection to base, and click another cell. Only
the base hole is shown.
2 In the tree, click Modify_Feature once to highlight the rule, then click
it again to enable edit mode.
3 Rename the rule to Hole_Rule, and press Enter.
4 Close the Rule Browser.
Previous (page 275) | Next (page 287)
1
Rule.
2 Name the new rule Chamfer_Rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule
dialog box.
The first part of the rule states that if the value for the Boolean parameter
chamfers is true, then the chamfers feature is activated.
3 Enter the If statement for this rule.
Bracket Width
100
1 in
200
2 in
300
3 in
Mass
Bracket Width
400
4 in
Add Values
First, we add the set of possible values for the mass parameter. Use the menus
in the Filters area to display only the Key parameters in the list. This filter
makes it easier to focus in on the mass parameter.
1 Right-click in any empty cell in the mass row, and select Make
Multi-Value from the context menu.
The Value List Editor opens.
2 In the Add New Item(s) field, add the values 200, 300, and 400 (the
value of 100 should already be in the Value list).
3 Click Add button to populate the Value list, and then click OK to accept
the list and return to the Parameters dialog box.
You can click the drop-down menu in the Multivalue field of the mass
row in the Parameter Editor to see the list of values.
4 Click Done to complete the modification of the mass parameter.
1
Rule.
Then
= 1
200 Then
= 2
Then
= 1
200 Then
= 2
300 Then
= 3
400 Then
= 4
2 Set the value of the mass parameter to 100. Notice that bracket_width
is set to 1 inch.
3 Change the mass parameter value to 200, and notice that the bracket
width changes again.
If you change the mass to 300, the width of the bracket increases to 3
inches. A mass of 400 results in a width of 4 inches. Try it!
Previous (page 287) | Next (page 294)
Width
1 in
2 in
3 in
Mass range
Width
4 in
6 in
bracket_width = 6
End If
With these changes, we check for a range of values in each If or Else
If statement.
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned the following:
Work with Parameters
Modify parameters.
Create rules.
To learn more about iLogic, we suggest that you take time to complete the
remaining iLogic tutorials.
Previous (page 294)
11
The Ribbon
New Users
Time Required
25 minutes
As you work through a series of basic exercises to become familiar with the
ribbon interface, it is not necessary to reproduce the sample geometry accurately.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return
to the previous one.
Next (page 300)
299
Interface Fundamentals
The fundamental characteristic of the new interface is that commands formerly
located on panel bars and toolbars are now located on tabs.
Commands formerly found on the various common menus are also located
on the tabs.
Commands formerly found on the File menu are now located on the
Application menu.
Set the
As mentioned, this tutorial uses a generalized, theoretical workflow to facilitate
your discovery of the interface. The workflow is only a vehicle for learning
and is not meant to be credible from an engineering or design point of view.
This workflow begins with a typical first task: setting the .
If Autodesk Inventor is in a zero-doc state (no files are open), you can access
the command on the tab:
Previous (page 300) | Next (page 302)
Create a Part
Create a part file with a default template:
1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the New command on the Quick
Access toolbar.
2 Select the Part template (the actual template standard is not important
for this tutorial).
Notice that tabs are subdivided into panels. For example, the sketch
commands you use for drawing geometry are grouped on the Draw
panel; the panel subdivisions group functionally related commands.
Previous (page 302) | Next (page 304)
This command provides the same results as the right-click marking menu
option of Finish Sketch, as well as the Return command.
The reason the command is so prominent is to help make it clear at all times
when you are in sketch mode.
For example, before you exit the sketch, select the Environments tab.
Notice that the Finish Sketch command persists on the Environments
tab, and the Sketch tab label is also highlighted.
It is possible to select other tabs at any time in your workflow, but the
persistence of Finish Sketch and the tab highlight help make it clear you
are still in sketch mode.
Click Finish Sketch.
Previous (page 303) | Next (page 306)
5 Press E on the keyboard. Notice that keyboard shortcuts behave the same
as always.
6 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box.
Previous (page 304) | Next (page 307)
Switch to an Environment
1 Select the Environments tab.
Previous (page 306) | Next (page 307)
Print
Print is located on the Application menu. Click
Print.
There is no need to print the file. Cancel the Print dialog box.
Previous (page 307) | Next (page 308)
Measure
1 Select the Tools tab. The Tools tab contains many of the commands
formerly found on the Tools menu.
2 Select the Distance command, located in the Measure panel.
Save
1 Click the Save command, located on the Quick Access Toolbar.
Create an Assembly
With many workflows and procedures within Autodesk Inventor, there is
often more than one method available to reach a given result. This
characteristic also applies to file creation. As an alternative to the New
command on the Quick Access Toolbar, you can access the file templates from
the Application menu. You can also use the Quick Launch command in the
Open dialog box.
Click
to expand the Application menu, then click the arrow next
to New to expand the submenu.
Notice that if you select New directly from the Application menu, the New
File dialog box opens.
If you click the arrow next to New, the New submenu expands. Alternatively,
the New submenu expands automatically after a short delay as you pause the
cursor over the New parent menu.
Previous (page 308) | Next (page 311)
Place Occurrences
1 Click the Place command, located in the Component panel of the
Assemble tab.
2 Pause the cursor over a panel to display the commands on that panel.
3 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tab and panel titles.
As an alternative to cycling through the ribbon states, select a state from the
drop-down menu.
You can also use the Clean Screen command to maximize model space
instantly.
1 Select the View tab.
You can also use the keyboard shortcut: press Ctrl 0 (zero) to switch from
Clean Screen display. The browser is restored and the tabs are also restored to
whatever state they were in previously.
Click the Minimize button, as needed, to restore the tabs to their full display.
Create Constraint
1 Select the Assemble tab.
2 Click the Constrain command.
You can create a constraint but is not necessary for the workflow.
Previous (page 313) | Next (page 319)
Customize Tabs
You can move commands you do not use, or commands you use less
frequently, to the drop-down portion of the tab panels.
1 Right-click the Bend command and select Move to Expanded Panel.
2 Click the panel title to expand the panel and show the moved command.
3 You can also click the pin icon to pin the panel in the expanded state,
as needed.
Right-click the tab and notice the other customize options. Experiment with
these options to tailor the tab to your preferences.
Previous (page 321) | Next (page 327)
Summary
The purpose of this tutorial was to help maximize your productivity within
the new interface, as quickly as possible. In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Find commands and command groupings within the tab structure.
Summary | 329
In addition to this tutorial, there are a couple other ribbon-related Help items:
Ribbon Introduction, a video overview of the ribbon interface.
12
Content Center
New Users
Time Required
30 minutes
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
Autodesk Inventor Content Center libraries provide thousands of standard parts
(fasteners, steel shapes, shaft parts, and so on). These libraries are accessed in
Content Center. Explore the Content Center functionality to utilize standard
parts in your designs.
The examples in this tutorial use content based on two different standards. If
your Content Center configuration does not contain the corresponding standard
libraries, read along without performing the steps. Or use a similar part from a
different library. For example, if the tutorial calls for a screw from the ANSI
standard and your library contains only ISO parts, substitute a similar screw
from your ISO library.
331
Prerequisites
Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 332)
1 Click
Manage Projects.
Favorites
AutoDrop
Tree View
Table View
TIP Some buttons may already be selected. Click them to make sure they
are switched on.
The Place from Content Center dialog box is the main interface for a
Content Center consumer. You can find, select, and place a standard part or
feature to an assembly. The dialog box presents a merged view of content
contained in all configured libraries.
The Place from Content Center dialog box displays several panels:
Category View panel on the left displays a tree structure of the current
Content Center database.
List View panel on the right displays all items available in a category
(folder) selected on the Category View panel.
Table View panel displays all members of a part (feature) family selected
on the List View panel.
Create iMates
The components that are supplied in the Content Center libraries include
iMates to make placement easier. Find the name of the insert iMate for the
previously placed cap screw. Then open Housing.ipt and edit it to create an
iMate with the same name.
1 In the browser, right-click the previously placed cap screw, and then
select Expand All Children. Make a note of the name of the insert
iMate, Insert In1.
2 Right-click the cap screw, and click Delete to delete it from the assembly.
3 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place,
and place one occurrence of the part Housing.ipt in the assembly.
8 Click the More button (>>) to expand the dialog box, and then type
Insert In1 in the Name field.
9 Click OK. The iMate is created in the part.
10 Click the Return command to return to the parent assembly.
Previous (page 335) | Next (page 338)
3 Right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family, and
select Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in the
List View.
4 Switch off the Table View panel.
5 Hold down the Alt key, and double-click the Forged Socket Head
Cap Screw - Metric family to place a member of the family in the
assembly.
6 In the Family dialog box, select the same family member as you placed
previously: select M6 from the Thread Description list, and then
select 30 from the Nominal Length list.
7 Select Use iMate, and then click OK.
The selected cap screw previews in place (honoring the specified Insert
iMate).
Use AutoDrop
AutoDrop enhances placement techniques with functional design automation.
It automatically checks geometry for placement and sizing based on the
content family characteristics.
Place head cap screws to the remaining mounting holes of the Housing part
by using AutoDrop.
1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place
from Content Center.
2 Use Search to find available head cap screws:
Insert the Head Cap Screw string in the Search For box of the
Quick Search panel.
3 On the Search Results panel, locate the DIN 6912 cylinder head
cap screw. Right-click it, and select Navigate to Category. The family
displays and selected in the List View.
4 Double-click the DIN 6912 family. The graphics window with the
assembly displays.
5 Position your cursor over an empty mounting hole as shown:
7 Drag the red arrow on the screw preview to change the nominal length
of the screw to 30 mm.
NOTE When you drag the red arrow, a tooltip shows the entire size of the
component.
8 Select Apply on the AutoDrop toolbar to place three cylinder head cap
screws.
9 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish the
command.
5 Click OK on the family dialog box. Then click OK on the message box.
All occurrences of the selected screw are replaced.
Summary
Summary | 345
Find a part family by using the Content Center browser, Search, and
History.
Replace a part with another part from the Content Center library.
13
Sketch Blocks
New Users
Time Required
40 minutes
347
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Define sketch blocks to capture geometric configurations as a fixed set, and
place instances of the set into an assembly layout.
In many assembly designs, geometric configurations are repeated. For example,
you can group 2D sketch geometry into a sketch block that represents a car
seat screw assembly. You can place instances of the block into your assembly
layout. The instances are defined in the sketch block. Any changes to the block
design are automatically reflected by the instances.
You could create nested sketch blocks to represent the car screw assembly and
place flexible instances of these blocks into your layout. These flexible instances
retain specified degrees of freedom that allow them to simulate the kinematics
of the screw assembly.
You start this tutorial in an existing part with 2D sketch geometry.
Objectives
Create, edit, and format sketch blocks.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools,
and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 348)
Get Started
Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks in Autodesk Inventor.
1 Click
Open.
After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in the
Model browser. Click Sketch1 and you see all geometry in the graphics
window highlighted. You can use one 2D sketch to create all your geometry
then group the appropriate geometry into sketch blocks.
1 Use navigation commands, such as View Face and Zoom Window,
to position the sketch geometry in the graphics window as shown.
2 Double-click Sketch1 in the Model browser.
NOTE You can pre-select geometry and activate the Create Block command,
or you can activate the command and select geometry.
4 For Block Name, enter Worm Gear Assy. You can also define the insert
point and add a description. The insert point is where the sketch block
is attached to the cursor when block instances are placed.
5 Click OK. The sketch block is created.
6 Expand Sketch1 in the Model browser. Pause the cursor over the sketch
block instance
, Worm Gear Assy:1. The associated sketch
geometry highlights in the graphics window.
Create Block creates a sketch block definition in the Blocks folder
and replaces the original 2D sketch geometry with an instance of
the block. Expand the Blocks folder to view the Worm Gear Assy
block definition node.
7 You can create multiple sketch blocks without closing the Create Block
dialog box. Click Create Block on the Sketch tab, and select the
geometry shown. Enter Connecting Rod as the Name, and click Apply.
The block is created, and the dialog box awaits selection of geometry for
the next block.
8 Select the geometry shown, and create the Link Plate sketch block.
9 Select the geometry shown, and create the Pivot Plate sketch block.
NOTE If you had created new geometry during the block edit, the new
geometry is automatically added to the block definition.
9 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block.
NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to
finish editing the block and return to the sketch.
10 To illustrate that the block definition has changed, drag and drop the
Worm Gear Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into the
graphics window.
Worm Gear Assy:2, another instance of Worm Gear Assy, is created
showing the rectangle geometry you added when you edited the block
definition in-context.
11 Exit Sketch1.
12 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition under Blocks. It
opens the Worm Gear Assy block definition out-of context.
13 Delete the rectangle geometry you previously added.
14 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. Both instances of Worm
Gear Assy are updated to show the geometry was removed.
3 Now, override the default format. Right-click the Worm Gear Assy:1
instance, and select Properties.
4 Select Blue for Line Color and click OK, then click in the graphics
window to clear the selection. The instance is now blue.
6 Open Sketch1.
7 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Format panel Sketch
Properties
You can also update your block properties to change the Insert Point
location, visibility, block name, and description. As with other block
edits, any changes are made to the block definition and reflected in all
block instances.
11 Double-click the Connecting Rod:1 instance.
12 Click in the graphics window to ensure that no geometry is selected.
13 With no geometry selected, right-click in open space in the graphics
window, and select Block Properties.
14 Click Select, and redefine the Insert Point. The Insert Point simply
defines the attachment point between the cursor and block instance,
when the instance is placed into the sketch.
9 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy:2 block instance, either in the Model
browser or in the graphics window.
10 Create a centerline down the axis of the Worm Gear Assy, as shown.
Ensure that the centerline endpoints are constrained to the Worm Gear
Assy geometry. This centerline will participate in a collinear constraint
with the centerline of the Connecting Rod.
NOTE Both instances of the Worm Gear Assy update to show the
centerline.
11 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. You are returned to the edit
of the Screw Rod Assy block.
NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Screw Rod Assy block
instance node to finish the edit of the Worm Gear Assy block. This returns
you to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block.
12 Apply the collinear constraint between the Worm Gear Assy and
Connecting Rod centerlines.
19 Click the corner geometry of either block instance in the graphics window
and drag.
Since the block instances are constrained at the sketch level, you can
move the block instances relative to one another. However, the geometry
within the block instances shows no relative motion. To manipulate the
block instance degrees of freedom outside of the block instances, you
toggle the block instance to Flexible.
20 Right-click each Screw Rod Assy instance, and check Flexible.
21 Click different sections of the block instance geometry, and drag to see
the effect.
22 Experiment with different constraints, both within the block instances
and at the sketch level, and note how you can simulate different
kinematics. You begin to see the power behind nested and flexible sketch
blocks.
23 Exit the sketch and drag the geometry. With the block instances toggled
to Flexible, the degrees of freedom remain exposed at the part level.
24 Save your part file and exit. The tutorial is complete.
Previous (page 355) | Next (page 367)
Summary
In this tutorial, you:
Created sketch blocks.
For further use of sketch blocks, visit the Top-down Workflow tutorial.
This tutorial demonstrates the use of sketch blocks in the top-down design
workflow. Remember to check Help for further details on sketch blocks.
Summary | 367
14
Parameters
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
369
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Create an external table of parameters. Then link it to an existing part file to
make the part a parametric table-driven model.
Objectives
Create a table.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the and navigate the model space with the various view
commands.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 370)
NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete this
tutorial.
Previous (page 369) | Next (page 371)
base
10
ht
=B1*2.7
lip
=B1*0.6
face
=B1*2.4
tdepth
=B1
tarc
=B1*0.6
tfix
=B1*0.6
chamfer
=B1*0.2
extrude1
=B1*1.2
10
extrude2
=B1*0.6
11
holedia
=B1*0.6
Open a Part
1 Switch to the Autodesk Inventor window. (If you have not started a
session yet, do so now.)
2 Click
Open.
3 Open nozzle.ipt.
Parameters
Each parameter in your model is prefixed by the letter d. You can edit any
parameter, however, d is reserved for parameter names. To avoid conflicts,
do not use this prefix when defining parameters in an external table.
To edit a parameter name or equation, click in the cell you want to change.
Summary
Using a simple symmetrical part, you learned how to:
Create an external table.
Using these techniques, you can create your own parametric, table-driven
models.
Summary | 387
388
15
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
389
Manifold_Block_no_rules.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
This tutorial expands upon the information presented in the iLogic Basics
tutorial. iLogic helps you write rules that can drive the parameters, features,
attributes, iProperties, and other elements in an Autodesk Inventor model.
The rules are stored within the part or assembly document.
iLogic rules are written in a language that is a slightly modified version of
Visual Basic .Net (VB.Net). The language is easy to learn, including the more
advanced features that are also available.
In the following lessons, you add rules to a parametric part.
Objectives
Use the parameter interface
Add a rule
Write a rule
Run a rule
Edit a rule
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling
functionality and concepts.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 391)
NOTE For more details on the exact steps needed to create a parameter,
please revisit the iLogic Basics tutorial. Remember that you can cut and paste
the values from the previous table to set the values for the multi-value list.
3 Make port_a_size a Key parameter.
4 Create two more parameters, named port_b_size and port_c_size,
with the same settings and multi-value list. Set both as Key parameters.
Previous (page 391) | Next (page 393)
2 In the Equation field of this new parameter, set the current value to
tee, and define it as a Key parameter.
3 Create a second text parameter named component_type, and define it
a multi-value parameter with the following values:
standard
custom
The first rule makes model changes to the Port B features, based on whether
the elbow or tee block is selected. To make this change, suppress or enable
the Port B features based on the type of block.
1
Rule.
not change the port size in our model. We must add rules to drive the different
port sizes.
Our first step is to add a rule that sets the size of the ports and the dimensions
of the screw pattern around each port. The screw pattern is used in the
assembly to hold a flange onto the block.
1 In the Autodesk Inventor model browser, expand the 3rd Party node
in the tree.
2 Right-click on Embedding 1, and select Edit to access the embedded
spreadsheet.
3 Add a rule named port_size_rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule
dialog box.
The first thing our rule must do is locate the row in the spreadsheet that
contains the values to use for Port A. We look up the value matching
the port_a_size parameter in a column labeled port_size.
4 In the Snippets area of the dialog box, on the System tab, locate the
function labeled FindRow (embedded) in the Excel Data Links
node. Double-click the function to insert it into the text area.
6 Add a series of parameters based on the values of cells from this row in
the spreadsheet. These parameters control the port diameter, drill depth,
and the distance between the bolt holes. Use the function labeled
CurrentRowValue in the Excel Data Links node of the Snippets
area.
Reorder Rules
Rules can be reordered after they are created. The order of rule execution
sometimes affects the results of these rules. You can alter the order of execution
from the Rule Browser.
2 Using the left mouse button, drag and drop the component_type rule
that we created above the block_shape_rule.
Update iProperties
We now add one more rule. This rule updates some of the iProperties for the
manifold block.
1 Add a new rule named part_number_rule. This rule set the Inventor
Part Number iProperty value.
For standard components, we can look up the Part Number in the
embedded spreadsheet. Then, we use the value in the model_code cell
to set the Part Number property for the part. You use the
iProperties.Value function, which is available in the iProperties node
of the Snippets area.
2 Using the iProperties.Value function, create the first part of the rule.
This part locates the row in the embedded spreadsheet from which to
read values. Locate the row using port_a_size.
1 Click
2 On the iProperties dialog box, click the Project tab. Text is entered next
to the Part Number.
3 Click Close to remove this dialog box.
Summary
By completing this tutorial, you now understand some of the basic iLogic
methods for turning a parametric single model into an intelligent super model!
In this tutorial, you:
Used the Inventor parameter interface.
Added a rule.
Wrote a rule.
Edited a rule.
In the next tutorial, you learn how to add rules at an assembly level to affect
Autodesk Inventor parts and iParts. During the tutorial, you are provided with
3D parametric models to which rules are added.
Previous (page 411) | Next (page 412)
iLogic - Assemblies
16
419
Experienced Users
Time Required
40 minutes
Manifold_Block.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
The steps for creating an assembly include the following:
Determine how to use the design in the present application, and how it
can be used in future applications.
Write the rules for your assembly in ordinary speaking language. These
simply written rules serve as a guide when you create the formal rules in
your design using iLogic Rule language.
After you have written the rules in plain language, place the components
into the assembly.
In this tutorial, the assembly you build is a simple manifold block with flange
fittings that are attached using socket head cap screws.
Objectives
Pass information from an assembly to its components
Suppress/unsuppress components
Suppress/unsuppress constraints
Update iProperties
Prerequisites
Knowledge of basic Autodesk Inventor assembly modeling techniques,
such as constraint creation.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 422)
3
Place.
In addition to the block, this assembly includes three union caps and
three sets of screws to attach the caps.
7 Select the Place command again, and double-click union_cap.ipt.
A copy of the component becomes attached to the mouse pointer. and
the Place Standard iPart dialog box is displayed.
8 Click the Table tab, and select iPart member Union-01 (Part Number
U-050).
9 Click in the graphics window to place a copy of the union cap near the
manifold block. Click two more times to add a total of three union caps,
then click Dismiss to close the dialog box.
3 Repeat the appearance selection for the other two union cap components.
We must change the names of the components in our assembly to reflect their
purpose. We also want to remove the iPart member identification.
Renaming our components ensures that future name changes to iPart members
do not cause our component names to become out of date in the rule. If the
names are out of date, the rule can fail to execute properly.
1 Navigate to the Model browser.
2 For each component listed here, double-click slowly on the name and
change it as indicated.
Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:1 with port_a_union.
Open the Parameters dialog box, and verify that the following
parameter values are set as indicated.
Parameter
Value
block
Tee
component_type
Standard
port_a_size
0.50
NOTE If the union cap is hidden within the block after creating the constraint,
click and drag the union cap away from the block.
The axis along the center of the top left screw hole of port_a_union.
5 Follow the previous steps for Port B and Port C. Use similar names for
the constraints.
2 click port_a_union_screw.
3 Click the Rectangular tab.
4 click the direction arrow in the Column area.
5 click the bottom horizontal edge of the Port A face.
6 Enter 1.50 for the horizontal distance.
10 Click OK.
11 Rename Component_Pattern_1 in the Model browser to be
port_a_screw_pattern.
2 click the name of the parameter containing 0.69 in the Equation cell.
port_b_union_part_number
port_c_union_part_number
port_a_screw_part_number
port_b_screw_part_number
port_c_screw_part_number
"block") = block
"component_type") =
"port_a_size") =
"port_b_size") =
"port_c_size") =
3 Double-click component_type_rule.
4 Copy the rule text to the clipboard.
5 Click Cancel on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it.
6 Double click my_manifold_block.iam in the Model browser.
8 Paste the copied rule text from component_type_rule into the rule
text area of the Edit Rule dialog box.
Add port_a_rule
When we change the port size of Port A, we must perform several tasks:
Change the port size.
If required, change the screw size, screw location, and screw kit part
number.
3 Add a code block that looks up the row being used based on the
port_a_size parameter. Then assigns values to two different assembly
parameters from two other columns.
"Screw-01")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-03")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-04")
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-05")
ElseIf port_a_size = 3.00 Then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-06")
End If
5 For the last part of this rule, add a statement that gets the part number
for the flare flange and stores it in an assembly parameter, which is used
in another rule later in this tutorial.
Add port_b_rule
Port B is different from Port A and Port C, because it does not exist in an
elbow manifold block. If the manifold block is an elbow style block, we must
suppress the union cap and the union screws used for this port. We must also
suppress the mate constraints associated with the union cap.
Because we are suppressing components, we set a level of detail before we
write the rule. Rules affecting items related to the level of detail in an assembly
require that a custom level of detail be defined and saved before writing the
rules. If the custom level of detail is not defined, iLogic generates an error
message.
Set a Level of Detail
1 In the Model browser, expand the Representations node and then
the Level of Detail node.
2 Right-click the Level of Detail node, and select New Level of Detail.
A new level of detail is added.
3 Slowly double-click LevelofDetail1, then and rename it to iLogic.
Write the Rule
2 For the first part of the rule, determine if we are making a tee-style block,
and store that in a separate variable isTee. The isTee variable holds a
value of True or False.
Note that we can use the isTee variable to turn these constraints on or
off according to the value of the block parameter.
NOTE The naming convention used for these constraints has made it easier
to refer to them in this rule. Remember that you can also use the Model tree
information in the Edit Rule dialog box to help complete the names of the
constraints.
4 Add two lines that conditionally include the port_b_union part and
corresponding screw pattern:
port_b_x_dist_between_screws =
iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")
port_b_union_part_number =
iProperties.Value("port_b_union", "Project", "Part
Number")
End If
We enclosed this entire block in an If isTee statement, so that these
lines are only processed for a tee-style manifold block. The statement
If isTee Then is equivalent to If isTee = True Then, but it provides
a more concise expression format.
We first choose the appropriate row in the s iPart table of the union part,
corresponding to the value of the port_b_size parameter, and then
extract the values to use for the x and y pattern offsets. Then, we extract
the Part Number from the union part, and store its value in another
parameter for later reference.
6 For the last part of this rule, we choose the member within the s iPart
table of the screw part to use for Port B. It is based on the value of the
port_b_size parameter. Use a series of If/Then/Else statements to
control it.
"Screw-01")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-03")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-04")
iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-05")
elseif port_b_size = 3.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-06")
End If
7 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the rule.
8 Save your assembly file.
Add port_c_rule
The rule for Port C is almost the same as for Port A, except that everything
referencing Port A must reference Port C instead.
7 In the Edit Rule dialog box, click in the rule text area, and press Ctrl+V
to paste the rule.
8 Click the Search and Replace tab at the top of the dialog box.
9 Enter port_a in Find what.
10 Enter port_c in Replace with.
11 Place a check mark in Match Case.
12 Click Replace All in This Rule.
2 Create the first section of the rule. This section computes a variable
portion of the part number, based on the port_a_size parameter value.
The value is held in a temporary variable named Screw_num1. Once
the value is determined, the rule constructs the entire part number string.
Use the Keywords drop-down menu on the toolbar above the text area
to help you fill in this rule.
Screw_num1
Case .75
Screw_num1
Case 1.00
Screw_num1
Case 1.25
Screw_num1
Case 1.50
Screw_num1
Case 2.00
Screw_num1
Case 2.50
Screw_num1
Case 3.00
Screw_num1
End Select
= 050
= 075
= 100
= 125
= 150
= 200
= 250
= 300
Screw_num1
Case 1.50
Screw_num1
Case 2.00
Screw_num1
Case 2.50
Screw_num1
Case 3.00
Screw_num1
End Select
= 125
= 150
= 200
= 250
= 300
Screw_num1
Case 1.50
Screw_num1
Case 2.00
Screw_num1
Case 2.50
Screw_num1
Case 3.00
Screw_num1
End Select
= 125
= 150
= 200
= 250
= 300
2 Create the first portion of the rule, which opens the spreadsheet and
writes the first three cell values.
End If
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_c_size
Note how we use a placeholder value of N/A for an elbow-style manifold.
4 Add another section to the rule which assigns cell values from parameters
contained in the manifold block component.
=
=
=
=
= "N/A"
= "N/A"
=
=
3 Change the block parameter value from tee to elbow. Then click in
some other cell or press Tab to apply the change, and note how the
model changes according to the rules.
Summary
In this final iLogic tutorial, you used iLogic to:
Edit iLogic parts from within an assembly
Summary | 459
Assembly_To_Parts_Rule
"block") = block
"component_type") =
"port_a_size") = port_a_size
"port_b_size") = port_b_size
"port_c_size") = port_c_size
Component_Type_Rule
port_c_size = port_a_size
End If
Port_A_Rule
port_a_y_dist_between_screws =
iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")
port_a_x_dist_between_screws =
iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")
If port_a_size = .50 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = .75 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = 1.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = 1.25 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = 1.50 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = 2.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = 2.50 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
elseif port_a_size = 3.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw",
End If
"Screw-01")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-03")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-05")
"Screw-06")
port_a_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_a_union",
"Project", "Part Number")
Port_B_Rule
"Screw-01")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-03")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-05")
"Screw-06")
Port_C_Rule
port_c_x_dist_between_screws =
iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")
If port_c_size = .50 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = .75 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = 1.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = 1.25 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = 1.50 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = 2.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = 2.50 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
elseif port_c_size = 3.00 then
iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw",
End If
"Screw-01")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-02")
"Screw-03")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-04")
"Screw-05")
"Screw-06")
port_c_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_c_union",
"Project", "Part Number")
Screw_Part_Number_Rule
Screw_num1
Case 1.25
Screw_num1
Case 1.50
Screw_num1
Case 2.00
Screw_num1
Case 2.50
Screw_num1
Case 3.00
Screw_num1
End Select
= 100
= 125
= 150
= 200
= 250
= 300
Screw_num1
Case 1.50
Screw_num1
Case 2.00
Screw_num1
Case 2.50
Screw_num1
Case 3.00
Screw_num1
End Select
= 125
= 150
= 200
= 250
= 300
Screw_num1
Case 2.00
Screw_num1
Case 2.50
Screw_num1
Case 3.00
Screw_num1
End Select
= 150
= 200
= 250
= 300
Update_Excel_Spreadsheet_Rule
= port_a_size
= port_b_size
= "N/A"
= port_c_size
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_depth") =
Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_depth")
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_width") =
Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_width")
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_height") =
Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_height")
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap")
port_a_union_part_number
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit")
port_a_screw_part_number
If block = "tee" Then
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap")
port_b_union_part_number
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit")
port_b_screw_part_number
Else
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap")
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit")
End If
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap")
port_c_union_part_number
GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit")
port_c_screw_part_number
GoExcel.Save
=
=
=
=
= "N/A"
= "N/A"
=
=
476
17
Derived Parts
Experienced Users
Time Required
20 minutes
477
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Derive the geometry of an existing part and use it to create a part model.
Derived parts offer several distinct advantages:
Derived part functionality can increase your efficiency by providing
foundational base geometry upon which to build unique design features.
The derived part is linked to the source file: any changes to the source file
can be instantly applied to the derived part.
The derived part can selectively include various part geometries and
characteristics, such as bodies, sketches, work features, and parameters.
Objectives
Use a derived part as the base feature of a new part.
Break the link between a derived part and its base part.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools,
and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 479)
In the New File dialog box, click the Metric tab, and then
All model features in the source filethe three extrusions, the hole, the
chamfer, and the consumed sketchesare derived into a single body. These
features are not available for edit in the derived part. The unconsumed sketch
you included is available and editable in the derived part.
Parameters.
3 For the parameter d2, change the equation from d1 * 5 to d1 * 7.
4 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.
5 Observe that the length of the part has increased.
To sever the link between the derived part and the base part permanently,
right-click the derived part in the Model browser, and then select Break
Link with Base Component.
The program breaks the associative link. You cannot restore the link.
To suppress the association to the source file, right-click the derived part,
and then select Suppress Link With Base Component.
To restore a suppressed link, right-click the derived part, and then select
Unsuppress Link With Base Component.
Summary
In an empty part, you learned how to:
Use an existing part as the base feature of a new derived part.
Break the link between a derived part and its parent part.
You can explore design alternatives with derived parts and build up libraries
of parts for use across your designs. Remember to check Help for further
information.
Summary | 487
488
18
iFeatures
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
489
TSlot-begin.ipt
TSlot-table.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Save an existing feature to a catalog and make it a reusable, table-driven
iFeature, and then reuse it in a part file.
iFeatures minimize mistakes and rework. You capture the correct information
once and then reuse the known, correct feature set.
To start, you extract and save a T-slot feature to an iFeature catalog. You create
an iFeature to utilize a table of parameters, which define sizes. Then, you open
a table model file and add a T-slot of a specific size using the iFeature. The
T-slot and table serve as a mounting for the cylinder clamp data set.
Objectives
Extract an existing feature and save it to an iFeature catalog.
Prerequisites
Complete the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.
Understand the material covered in the Getting Started PDF and the Help
topic Getting Started.
Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the
Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 491)
Create an iFeature
1 OpeniFeatures TSlot-begin.ipt.
This sketch contains a fully constrained profile with six dimensions and
two collinear constraints. One dimension and one collinear constraint
position the T Slot geometry on the face of Extrusion1 and are of no
8 Now, click
Insert an iFeature
1 Open the supplied file TSlot-table.ipt, which contains a shop table
top.
iFeature.
3 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click the Browse button.
4 In the Open dialog box, double-click the Slots folder.
5 Click the tutorial_TSlot.ide iFeature file that you created.
6 Click Open.
7 In the graphics window, click the face shown:
Place an iFeature
12 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel View Face,
and select Sketch2 in the Model browser.
13 Adjust your view zoom to see the T Slot sketch and the left edge of the
table.
NOTE Sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you
recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you will have
undisplayed the sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial
does not require the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the
grid displayed or undisplayed.
NOTE Your sketch may be positioned in a location that differs from the
illustration.
14 Place a 40-mm dimension between the left vertical edge of the table
and the vertical construction line in the center of your T Slot sketch.
15 Place a Collinear constraint between the top-most line in your T Slot
sketch and the top edge of the table. Your sketch should now match the
following illustration:
16 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbbon to exit the sketch and create the
T Slot iFeature.
The red arrow indicates the location of the placed T Slot iFeature.
Previous (page 492) | Next (page 496)
In the next portion of the tutorial, you convert the iFeature that you just
created to a table-driven iFeature. It will place T Slots of different sizes. You
will edit the table definition to contain the various size parameters. You will
also add a key to use to select a slot of a certain size during placement.
1 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide.
iFeatures are stored in files with an *.IDE file extension. They contain
geometry representing the features they will add (or subtract). The
tutorial_TSlot file contains black surfaces representing the cut extrude.
You do not make any edits to model features using the iFeature Author
Table.
Author Table.
3 Right-click the 1 in the cell to the left of the 12-mm parameter in the
lower portion of the iFeature Author dialog box. Select Insert Row from
the context menu.
5 Add two additional rows. Set the values for the first row to d2 = 18 mm,
d4 = 29 mm, d6 = 19 mm, and d7 = 11 mm. Set the values for the
second row to d2 = 22 mm, d4 = 35 mm, d6 = 25 mm, d7 = 14 mm.
The parameter table portion of your dialog box should appear as shown.
6 Click the Other tab in the iFeature Author dialog box, and then click
on the text Click here to add value.
7 In the Name column, click on New Item0 and change the text to Size.
8 In the Prompt column, click on Enter New Item0 and change the
text to Select size.
9 Click the gray key-shaped icon to the left of Size. Notice that the icon
changes to blue, and a blue key icon displays in the Size column heading
which is now included in the parameter table portion of the dialog box.
10 Edit the Size key value for each of the rows in your parameter table as
follows:
Value for row 1:
M10x1.5
M12x1.75
M16x2.0
M20x2.5
NOTE Metric T Nuts are designated by both the slot dimensions and the
thread size of the tapped hole. The Size value entered previously is the
thread designation for one T Slot size. Not all slot sizes are covered by the
values in this tutorial.
11 Click OK to save the added rows and key column to your iFeature
definition.
12 Save and close tutorial_TSlot.ide.
Summary
iFeatures save both time and money! By capturing commonly used features
or groups of features once you are able to minimize the effort required to reuse
these features in other design situations. By accurately capturing these features
one time, you can ensure they can be reused repeatedly and correctly.
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Extract existing features and save them as an iFeature.
That once placed, iFeatures are no longer associated to the IDE file that
defines the iFeature.
19
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
This tutorial is created for a single user environment with libraries stored in a
Desktop Content location. If you are a member of a workgroup that shares
libraries on a server, you must be a library administrator and have editor
permissions to perform library editing tasks. Also, the method for creating user
libraries on the server is different than presented in this tutorial.
The examples in this tutorial use content based on several different standards.
If your Content Center configuration does not contain the same library, read
along without performing the steps, or use a similar part from a different library.
For example, if the tutorial calls for a machine screw from the JIS standard and
501
your library contains only ANSI parts, substitute a similar screw from your
ANSI library.
Objectives
Create user libraries to customize content from standard libraries.
Prerequisites
Know Autodesk Inventor assembly and part fundamentals.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 502)
1 Click
Manage Projects.
NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one standard Content Center
library must be available for use. A standard library can be identified as
available if the In Use option is selected and the status in the Access column
is Read Only.
TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. See
Help for more details or contact your CAD Administrator.
5 If you work in the Desktop Content environment, click the Create
Library command on the Configure Libraries dialog box.
NOTE If your Content Center libraries are stored on a server, verify that a
user read/write library is available and you can use it for this exercise.
Alternatively, you can create a library by using the server console and then
add it to the library configuration in the project. See the Help for more details.
6 Enter Tutorial Library in the Display Name field. The File Name
uses the same string automatically.
7 Click OK. The Tutorial Library is created in the Desktop Content folder.
8 A newly created library is automatically added to the Content Center
configuration. Verify that the In Use box is selected for the Tutorial
Library, and the library status is Read/Write.
9 Click OK to close the Configure Libraries dialog box.
10 Click Save in the Projects dialog box, and then click Done.
Previous (page 501) | Next (page 503)
6 Right click the R-Ring family and select Family Properties. Open the
Link tab and review the information about creation method and parent
family. Then, close the Family Properties dialog box.
Previous (page 502) | Next (page 504)
4 Click the Material cell in the first row and change Steel, Mild to
Titanium by selecting Titanium from the drop-down list of available
materials.
5 Click the Material cell in the second row and change Steel, Mild to
Galvanized Steel.
6 Click Apply to save the changes in the library. Then click OK to close
the message box.
7 Click OK to close the Family Table dialog box.
Previous (page 503) | Next (page 505)
5 Click the Review command to display the Review dialog box. The first
row in the table on the Review dialog box displays expressions for File
Name, Part Number, and key family table columns of the newly
created family. The following rows display the first three rows of the
family table.
Click OK to close the Review dialog box.
NOTE You can edit expressions in the Review dialog box to customize the
family table for the family copy.
6 Click OK in the Save Copy As dialog box to start the copying process.
After the process ends, the merged view displays the original JIS B 1169 Metric family and the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family. The Copy of
JIS B 1169 - Metric family is enabled for editing.
4 On the My JIS B 1169 Nut family dialog box, click OK to place the first
family member.
5 One occurrence of the nut is placed in the assembly. Right-click in the
graphics window, and click Done to finish the placement.
6 Review the name of your part in the assembly browser.
7 Right-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut part, and click iProperties. Then:
On the General tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Location
field, notice that the part is saved in the My Parts folder.
8 To compare properties of your part and the original part from the
standard library, place a member of the JIS B 1169 - Metric family.
Then, open the Properties for the JIS B 1169 - Metric part.
Previous (page 507) | Next (page 508)
3 Before you publish, you will create an iPart factory based on this part.
The rows in the factory correspond to the Content Center family
members (size variations) in the published family.
On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel
Parameters and take note of d0 (part width), d1 (height), and d2
(length).
Click Next.
10 Review the default thumbnail image. You can use it in this example.
Summary
Edit the family table for a family from a standard Content Center library.
Top-down Workflow
20
Experienced Users
Time Required
60 minutes
515
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you explore aspects of top-down design for a power car seat.
You use a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components. You also change the
layout to demonstrate associativity.
A layout is a 2D sketch within a part file. The 2D sketch uses sketch geometry
to represent your design components and configurations. The layout is the
root document of your design, and allows you to control your design
associatively from the top down.
Once your layout has matured, you use the Make Components and Make
Part commands to derive selected sketch blocks into new part and assembly
files. Associativity is maintained between your layout and the new files so
that your 3D models are updated with changes to their respective sketch
blocks. For Make Components, changes you make to the arrangement of
components do not require updates to your 3D models. This powerful feature
eliminates unnecessary revisions to your design documents.
This tutorial opens an existing layout part with 2D sketch geometry.
Objectives
Place and constrain sketch block instances.
Derive sketch blocks to new part and assembly files (Make Components).
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project, navigate the model space with the
various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as
sketching and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Get Started
In this tutorial, the intent is to demonstrate some of the functionality available
to support your top-down design workflow. As such, the tutorial has you
continue the layout of a motorized car seat near the end of the layout process.
The part file already contains the sketch blocks needed so that you can quickly
complete your layout and move on to the component creation phase. In a
more typical design effort, you would have started by creating the layout part
and sketch blocks already present in this file.
1 Click
Open.
NOTE In this tutorial, you save the changes you make to the source tutorial files.
If you need to replace the modified files with the original source files, re-install the
source files from your installation software. Alternatively, back-up the source
Tutorial Files directory to another location and access the back-up files as
needed.
Previous (page 515) | Next (page 517)
geometry. You must add a flexible instance of the Screw Rod Assy_Front
block to complete the layout.
1 In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to open it for edit.
2 Expand Sketch1.
3 Expand the Blocks folder near the top of the browser. This folder
contains all sketch block definitions.
4 Drag the Screw Rod Assy_Front block from the Blocks folder into
the graphics window. It adds an instance of the block to your layout.
Make Components
Once your layout and sketch blocks have matured, you derive the sketch block
instances to part and assembly files. The shape of each component is associated
to the corresponding sketch block. The combination of the layout constraint
and layout part controls the position of each component within an assembly.
1 In the browser, ensure that Sketch1 is expanded.
2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Layout panel Make
Components.
In the Make Components: Selection dialog box, you select the sketch
block instances to derive, and choose whether to place the new
components in a target assembly.
3 Select Screw Rod Assy_Front:1. In the dialog box, refer to the selection
browser to ensure that Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 is selected. You should
see a hierarchy that shows the Screw Rod Assy_Front block definition
as the parent and Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 as the child.
12 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save the file
Seat Adjust Layout.iam and associated components.
NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirm
that you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK.
13 The layout part to which your components are constrained, Seat Adjust
Layout:1, has visibility turned off. It avoids unnecessary geometry in
the graphics window. Expand the layout part, and pause over Sketch1
to view the layout sketch from which you derived the new components.
NOTE You can change the offset value by selecting the Layout constraint
browser entry and typing a new value in the browser edit field. You
demonstrate this behavior in the next exercise.
18 Pause the cursor over various objects under Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.
A layout part Screw Rod Assy_Front_Layout:1 and layout constraints
were also created in the subassembly. For each assembly that is created,
a layout part and layout constraints are required to position the assembly
components as described by the layout.
19 Expand the subassembly parts Worm Gear Assy_Front:1 and
Connecting Rod:1. Pause the cursor over the Flush:1 constraint. This
constraint was created by the translation of the collinear sketch constraint
into the equivalent assembly constraint.
20 Click one of the components in the graphics window and drag. The
kinematics of the components were preserved by creation of the Flush:1
constraint.
21 Undo the position changes to return the components to their default
positions.
22 Save your file.
Previous (page 517) | Next (page 524)
Note the addition of the new components in the browser. Pause the
cursor over the new components. Link Plate:1 and Link Plate:2
appear to be the same geometry because of their XY position. In
subsequent steps, you differentiate the two components with an offset
along the Z axis.
11 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save Seat
Adjust Layout.iam and associated components.
NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirm
that you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK.
12 Click Seat Pan:1 and drag. Again, note that the seat kinematics are
demonstrated.
13 Undo the position changes to return the components to their default
locations.
14 Currently, all components are constrained to the layout plane. Assume
that the layout plane is the mid-plane of the seat. You can turn off
Constrain to layout plane, move the components along the Z axis,
then turn on Constrain to layout plane. The flush constraints will
be re-enabled so that the components can only move parallel to the
layout plane. However, now the constraints have an offset value that
corresponds to their separation distance from the layout plane.
In the browser, expand Link Plate:1, and expand the Layout:2
constraint.
15 Right-click Link Plate:1, and select Layout Constraint. Turn off
Constrain to layout plane. The XY Flush:2 constraint is suppressed
and Z Angle:2 is enabled.
16 Rotate your sketch to view the geometry off-plane.
17 Click Link Plate:1, in the graphics window, and drag in the positive
Z direction. It offsets the components from the layout plane.
25 Offset Pivot Plate:2 from the layout plane by 84.25 mm in the positive
Z direction.
26 Finish the edit of Front Pivot Weldment:1.
4 Enter 3.5 mm for the extrude distance, and use the flip direction arrows
to extrude in the negative Z direction.
5 Click OK. Link Plate:2 is also updated to reflect the added feature.
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Add a block instance and sketch constraints to your layout.
Summary | 533
534
21
535
Experienced Users
Time Required
20 minutes
WormGear.iam
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
A substitute representation is a type of level of detail representation that
provides another way to improve assembly performance through reduced
memory use. Memory savings occur anywhere you use the substitute
representation, such as in drawings or presentations.
There are two different methods you can use to create a substitute level of
detail representation:
Substitute an assembly with a derived part created from that assembly.
The derived part is based on a reduced-part level of detail representation
created in that assembly.
For both methods, you substitute an assembly with a part. Both methods can
provide significant memory savings.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 538)
Assume for this exercise that the only critical functional geometries in this
assembly are the two shaft ends and the mounting holes on the gear box part.
For clear visual reference, the general shape and appearance of the assembly
are also important. Other internal parts are not needed with respect to how
this assembly might relate to other components in a hosting assembly.
Previous (page 536) | Next (page 538)
Workflow Overview
Before you begin, look at the creation steps for the two methods from a big
picture point-of-view.
icon.
Part-on-disk method:
1 Create or open a part to use as a substitute.
2 Designate the part as a substitute.
3 In the owning assembly, use the New Substitute Select Part File
command to specify the substitute part for the representation.
From an authoring point of view, the derive in-place part method is quicker
most of the time. However, from a memory savings point of view, the
simplified part provides more benefit since you have thorough and explicit
control of geometric complexity.
Previous (page 538) | Next (page 540)
5 Click OK.
The derived part is created, and the new substitute level of detail
representation is automatically set as Active.
Previous (page 540) | Next (page 543)
The assembly browser shows only the derived part while the substitute
representation is active. In addition, the name of the subassembly with
the active substitute level of detail representation is listed next to the
owning assembly browser node.
2 Save and close the assembly.
Previous (page 542) | Next (page 544)
When you save, the program prompts you to save a user-named level of
detail representation for the top-level assembly (the consuming assembly).
10 Use the default name for the representation.
The consuming assembly is Assembly(#).iam. A consuming assembly is an
assembly that contains a subassembly that owns an active substitute level of
detail representation.
The owning assembly is WormGear:1. The owning assembly is the assembly
where the substitute level of detail representation is defined and active. Notice
that the active level of detail representation is listed next to the browser node.
Previous (page 543) | Next (page 545)
Part-on-disk Method
In the following steps, you create a substitute level of detail representation
using a supplied, manually created substitute part. The derived part you created
earlier created a significant savings in relative memory consumption. The
simplified substitute can consume less memory than the derived part,
depending on the number of features of the part.
1 In the assembly document, right-click the WormGear subassembly in
the browser, and then select Open.
2 Save the assembly.
3 Expand the Representations folder, right-click the Level of Detail
node, and then select New Substitute Select Part File.
4 Select single_part.ipt.
5 Click Open.
A message states the part will be designated as a substitute, and that all
links to external references for the part will be disabled.
6 Click Yes.
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a part derived
from the owning assembly.
This tutorial demonstrated the workflow steps to create and use substitute
level of detail representations. There are various other behaviors and items of
interest to note with this functionality. Consult Help for further detailed
information.
Summary | 549
Presentations
22
551
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
Cylinder Clamp.iam
Cylinder Clamp.idw
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
The assembly explosions you create within Inventor Studio cannot be placed
as drawing views in IDW or DWG drawing files. Use presentations instead.
To begin, you open the supplied Cylinder Clamp dataset, and create a
presentation file from the default (mm) template.
Objectives
Place a view.
Prerequisites
Complete the Parts 2, Assemblies, and Drawings tutorials.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 552)
Get Started
1 Set your project to tutorial_files.
2 Click
Open.
4 Click
New.
View
menu.
The Select Assembly dialog box displays with the previously opened
Cylinder Clamp assembly selected.
Notice in the Explosion Method area of the dialog box that Manual
is selected by default. This method is probably the method you will use
most often. An Automatic explode option can also be selected. The
Automatic method requires that you supply a distance value. All
components within the selected assembly will be exploded that distance
using any previously defined assembly constraints.
Each part that you model with Inventor inherits a material from the template
you use when you begin your design.
During the design process, you can elect to assign specific appearances to a
part and you can elect to override the appearance of the part within an
assembly. These options can aid in the design process by highlighting areas
of focus. All hydraulic components might have a blue appearance in one
assembly representation while all components purchased from a specific
vendor might have a green appearance in another.
The appearances used during the design process may not represent the actual
appearance of the completed design. For the purposes of presentations and
renderings intended for customers or marketing, alternative appearances may
be explored.
The images used in this tutorial are based on an alternative appearance scheme
for the Cylinder Clamp assembly.
The appearances have no impact on the results you will achieve in this tutorial.
Previous (page 552) | Next (page 556)
Create Tweaks
Your view should appear oriented as shown in the following image. Use Orbit
to adjust your view as required.
Components
, or right-click and select Tweak Components
from the marking menu.
The Tweak Component dialog box displays. To create a tweak, you must
define a direction, select components to move, and provide a distance.
When the Tweak Component dialog box is first displayed, the Direction
button is active.
Notice that the Z axis points outwards (away from the face). The Y axis
points upwards. The X axis points in what would be the positive
horizontal direction.
3 Click to select this direction orientation. Notice that the direction axis
triad changes color after you select the face. Also, the Z axis button in
the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box is
selected.
NOTE The direction axes depend upon the selected geometry. By selecting
an angled edge of (any) component, you can manually explode using the
selected edge as the Z axis of the direction triad. Notice how the X, Y and
Z axes differ in the illustration based on the selection of: 1) face, 2) edge or
3) edge.
You will now move the purchased air cylinder upwards as your first
tweak.
4 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the Tweak
Component dialog box. Notice that the Y axis of the direction triad
changes color in the graphics window.
By default, the Z axis is active, and you must move the cylinder upwards
along the Y axis. Your first step is to change the transformation direction.
5 Select the Cylinder Body subassembly in the Model browser. To do so,
first click the + next to the Explosion1 node located directly under the
top Cylinder Clamp node.
6 Next, click the + to the left of the Cylinder Clamp.iam assembly node
to see the components of the assembly.
7 In the Model browser, move your cursor over the component name
Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. Notice the red rectangle that highlights the
text. When the text highlights, click to select the subassembly.
8 Move your cursor over an empty space in the graphics window, then
click and drag your cursor up (towards the top edge of the window).
Notice that:
9 Stop dragging (release the mouse button), and move your cursor over
the transformation value field in the Tweak Component dialog box.
10 Double-click on the field to edit the value. Type 100, and press the Enter
key on your keyboard to move the subassembly precisely 100 mm along
the Y axis from its original position.
11 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box.
The dialog box is then reset for a new tweak.
You will next move the clamp in the X direction.
Previous (page 554) | Next (page 560)
Tweak Clamp.ipt
1 After completing the previous exercise, the Direction button is again
active. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base previously
selected, and click to select it.
4 When the part highlights, click and drag it towards the left side of the
graphics window.
You will next move the retaining ring outwards along the axis of the pin.
Previous (page 556) | Next (page 561)
2 Move your cursor over the pin that was exposed when you moved the
clamp.
3 When the pin highlights, click to define the direction axis.
4 In this case, you want to move the retaining ring along the Z axis (the
default active transformation axis). Click both retaining rings to select,
and then drag both to the left side of the view.
Notice that the trail for the retaining ring that was farthest away does
not perfectly overlap the longer trail.
6 Click the + next to the Model browser node for ANSI B 27.7M
3AMI-7:1.
7 Right-mouse click the Tweak entry in the Model browser, and select
Visibility. The check mark is removed, the browser entry displays as
unavailable, and the displayed trail in the graphics window is no longer
visible.
8 Click
Save. By default, the Presentation file created has
the same name as the assembly that was placed initially. Presentation
files have the IPN file type extension. Your file is named Cylinder
Clamp.ipn.
Next, you will place the exploded view that you just created onto a new sheet.
You will create the sheet in the assembly drawing you edited in the Drawings
tutorial.
Previous (page 560) | Next (page 563)
Open.
2 Select the Cylinder Clamp.idw drawing that was saved during the
Drawings tutorial.
3 Right-mouse click on the Cylinder Clamp.idw node at the top of the
Model browser, and click New Sheet on the pop-up context menu.
4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab Create panel Base, or
right-click and select Base View from the marking menu. The Drawing
View dialog box displays.
5 By default, Cylinder Clamp.iam displays in the File name field. Click
the down arrow at the right side of the field and select Cylinder
Clamp.ipn from the drop-down list.
6 Next, click Current in the Orientation area of the Drawing View
dialog box.
7 Click the drawing sheet to place the exploded view.
9 Click
Save.
Click the Cylinder Clamp.ipn tab along the lower edge of the
application.
Click the Open Documents up arrow along the lower edge of the
application, and select Cylinder Clamp.ipn from the list of open
documents.
You will now add a Tweak to your Presentation that contains some
direction changes.
4 Click the Lock Pin instance that appears closest to you in the view.
14 Click
Save.
Rotational Tweaks
1 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab Create panel Tweak
Components, or right-click and select Tweak Components from the
marking menu.
2 Define your Direction axes by clicking the vertical edge of Clamp.ipt
as shown:
4 Click and drag in the graphics window to rotate the clamp. Alternatively,
enter a precise angle value in the field to the right of Rotate Axis, and
press Enter to rotate the clamp by the entered value.
Summary
Tweaks can leave visible trails. They can be displayed or not displayed.
Summary | 571
What Next? Exploded assembly views can be output as animations from the
Presentation file. Explore the animation capabilities by clicking Animate on
the Create panel of the Presentation tab. Animations created by this method
cannot be rendered or manipulated with as much control as is possible using
Inventor Studio. Explore the animation capabilities offered by Inventor Studio
by completing the Studio - Animations tutorial.
Previous (page 568)
23
Experienced Users
Time Required
60 minutes
PFTutorial.ipt
Control_Button_Solid.ipt
573
PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt
PFTutorial_Complete.ipt (finished version)
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Create a plastic case for a hand-held music device using the basics of
multi-body and plastic feature functionality in Inventor. Automate the creation
and editing of common plastic part features.
A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. You create and position multiple
solid bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially useful
in the design of plastic parts.
A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file relationships and
projected edges between parts. All editing takes place in a single file. At any
time, you can generate unique part files for each body. The generated files are
derived parts that are associative to the master design in the original part file.
If you do not want to learn how to use the plastic features commands, use the
file PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt as a start point. Begin the tutorial at the
section titled Insert a toolbody using Derive.
Before you begin, open and review the supplied plastic part. To simplify the
process of body and feature creation, the tutorial part sketches, work planes,
and surfaces are named to help you identify them.
You can complete the tutorial in segments if you save your work before you
exit.
Objectives
Create new bodies using Split.
Prerequisites
Intermediate level of understanding part modeling.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
2 In the browser, expand the folders for the solid and surface bodies.
Note that there is only one solid body present and four surface bodies.
One of the surface bodies is visible, and all the others are not visible.
Thickness = 0 mm
Height = 2 mm
Outside Height = 0 mm
We will skip the Island tab. This sketch does not contain a closed
boundary for an island. The following image shows an example of an
island.
Thickness = 2.5 mm
Height = 1.3 mm
Thickness = 5 mm
Bottom Offset = 0 mm
In the following sequence, we will define the rules which allows the entire
grill to be filleted in a few picks.
1 In the browser, turn off the Visibility of the bottom solid without the
grill. Rotate the part with the grill feature to the inside face of the solid.
TIP The context menu contains three commands to control body display:
Visibility, Show All, and Hide Others.
2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Rule
Fillet.
Use the Source drop-down to set the source to Face.
Select the inside curved face of the grill as shown in the following
image.
3 Click OK. You created 128 fillets using rules and a couple of picks.
NOTE The Rule Fillet can be used on any feature in a part file. It is not exclusively
for use with plastic parts.
Previous (page 578) | Next (page 586)
Create a Rest
We now want to build a flat area for some control buttons.
1 Orient the view to the outside of the part as shown in the following
image.
2 Turn on the visibility of RestSketch in the browser.
3 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Rest.
4 On the Shape tab:
Select the RestSketch as the profile. If it is the only visible sketch
it is automatically selected.
Create a Lip
We will now build a lip-groove combination to facilitate placing the mating
parts in a physical assembly. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the
following image.
1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Plastic Part panel Lip.
2 Make sure the Lip button is selected in the dialog box.
3 On the Shape tab:
Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.
6 In the Solid Bodies folder in the browser, use the context menu to turn
off the Visibility of the top body. Turn on the visibility for the bottom
body. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the following image.
Next, we will use the Lip command to create the mating groove.
7 Click the Lip command.
The mating lip and groove features are shown in the following cutaway
view.
5 Click OK to finish.
6 A new body is created. Turn off the Visibility of the bottom body
and Srf2 (BatterySplitSurface) before proceeding.
Previous (page 587) | Next (page 595)
Select the Guide Face option, and pick the planar face next to the
selected edge.
Check the Path Extents box, and select the two planes.
The preview shows the portions of the Lip that are selected (first and
last). If the preview matches the following image, the selection is
correct. If it does not match the preview, click the green and yellow
dots to change the selection.
The work planes are not shown in the following image. Leave the
visibility of the work planes on to create the mating lip feature on the
bottom body.
6 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover, and turn on the Visibility
of the bottom body.
We will now create the mating groove for the battery cover on the bottom
body.
7 Click the Lip command.
On the Shape tab, click Groove.
Select the Guide Face, and pick the planar face next to the edge.
Click the Path Extents check box and select the two limiting planes.
The default selection of the two outer groove segments is correct.
9 Click OK to create the groove feature. Turn off the Visibility of the
work planes.
The following image shows the lip and groove features in a cutaway view
of the battery cover and the lower body.
Select the two sketch points as the Centers. If they are the only
sketch points displayed, they are automatically selected.
Click the Flip direction arrow and the Catch direction manipulator
arrows in the graphics area until the clips are oriented as shown in
the following image.
We do not want the fillet around the top edges (red arrows). The edges
are included because they share the curved face of the Snap Fit that
coincides with the curved face of the battery body. They are called
"merged faces." We can skip such merged faces (and all the edges they
share) by doing the following:
2 Click More to expand the dialog box.
3 Check the Remove Merged Faces box to enable the option.
4 Click OK to create the rule fillet. Both clips are filleted since they both
belong to the same feature.
5 Save the file.
Create a Boss
This exercise consists of two procedures: creating screw mounting bosses on
the top and bottom bodies, and then creating mating bosses for the thread
portion of the fasteners.
First, we use work points to model the screw mounting bosses on the top and
bottom bodies.
1 Turn on the Visibility of the bottom body and Work Points 1-4. The
work points are located at the termination position of each boss.
For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrows
do not point towards the body.
8 Rotate the body to see the recess for the screw head.
Next, we build the mating bosses for the thread portion of the fasteners.
1 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover and the bottom solid, and
turn on the Visibility of the top solid.
2 Click the Boss command.
For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrows
do not point towards the body.
NOTE To add participants to the Hole operation, use the Solids selector
and pick additional bodies. An example of this could be if you want multiple
bodies to participate in a Through All operation.
Previous (page 607) | Next (page 617)
We will now use the Derive command to import another part file to use as
a cutting tool later in the exercise.
NOTE If you skipped the plastic features sections, you can open the file
PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt and begin the tutorial here.
1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Insert panel Derive.
2 In the file open dialog box, select the file Control_Button_Solid.ipt.
3 In the Derived Part dialog box, you can select any of the solid body
options, but do not select the surface feature option.
NOTE If the component you are inserting is an assembly, and you choose
to maintain each solid as a solid body, the result is multiple bodies in the
Solid Bodies folder.
4 Click OK to finish.
5 The new body is inserted in the part. Rotate the part to view the new
body.
Moving Bodies
In this section, we will use the Move Bodies command to position the
toolbody accurately we imported.
The drop-down menu in the Move Bodies dialog box offers three methods for
moving a body:
Free drag (default) - Use to drag the selection in any direction or specify
precise x,y,z values.
Move along ray - Axial move only. Use to drag or specify a precise value
along an axis.
Rotate about line - Use to drag the selection or specify a precise angle
around a central axis.
1 View the part from the side to expose the toolbody.
2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Move Bodies.
3 Select the imported body as the body to move.
4 The body shows a 10 mm offset in the preview. Do not drag the preview.
NOTE Move Body appears in the browser as a feature, and the move was
calculated as a single feature. Using Click to add consumes the least
amount of resources as opposed to doing multiple moves as individual
features. You can edit, delete, or suppress individual body moves.
Previous (page 617) | Next (page 620)
The part file controls the master design. If changes are made to a body
in the originating part file, the part will update in the assembly.
Summary
In this tutorial, you:
Used Split to create new bodies.
Summary | 623
Studio - Renderings
24
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
Objectives
Prerequisites
Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools,
and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return
to the previous one.
Next (page 626)
625
Get Started
Previous (page 625) | Next (page 626)
Activate Studio
On the ribbon, click Environments tab Begin panel Inventor
Studio.
Previous (page 626) | Next (page 626)
Render
1 On the ribbon, click Render tab Render panel Render Image.
Change Styles
1 In the Render Image dialog box, click Select Output Size
and then select 640 x 480 from the Resolution menu. You can adjust
the size and view of the model to fit within the render rectangle, as
needed.
2 Select Desktop from the Lighting Style drop-down menu.
3 On the Output tab, select High Antialiasing, and click Render.
The Render process takes some time. If you do not want to wait for the
model to complete the rendering process, click Cancel Rendering.
You can specify different cameras, lighting, and scene styles for rendering
from the Render dialog box. It is not necessary to activate them.
4 Close the Render Output and Render Image dialog boxes when finished.
Previous (page 626) | Next (page 627)
Change Appearance
Next, you change the appearance of the arbor press frame.
1 Select the Arbor_Frame component in the graphics window or browser,
and then select Aluminum (Cast) from the Appearance Override
pulldown list. The list is located at the top of the Autodesk Inventor
window in the Quick Access Toolbar and shows the current appearance
selection.
2 Click Render Image.
3 Select 320 x 240 from the Resolution menu.
4 Select the Output tab, and then change the Antialiasing to Low
Antialiasing.
5 Click Render.
Previous (page 627) | Next (page 628)
Save Image
1 Click Save Rendered Image.
2 Browse to an appropriate directory, and assign a file name.
3 Select a file type from the Save as type menu, and then click Save.
The rendered image is now available for direct use in your documentation
files, or you can edit the image further in a graphics editing software
application.
4 Close the Render Output window.
Previous (page 627) | Next (page 628)
Image Extents
Notice that the program renders the image within the space defined by the
rectangle in the graphics window. In this example, the reflection is cut off at
the bottom edge of the graphics window. Experiment with different resolutions
and adjust the model view to allow space for reflection and shadow effects,
as needed.
For example:
1 Select the General tab in the Render Image dialog box.
2 Enter 300 in the Width field, and enter 600 in the Height field.
3 Ensure that Lock Aspect Ratio is not selected.
4 View your results.
Previous (page 628) | Next (page 628)
Summary
Previous (page 628)
Studio - Animations
25
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
Objectives
Prerequisites
Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools,
and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return
to the previous one.
629
Activate Studio
1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab Begin panel Inventor
Studio
2 In the browser, right-click the node named Lighting (Table Top), and
then remove the check mark next to Visibility. This change removes
the lighting symbols from the graphics window.
3 Activate a scene style for the best rendering. Several scene styles are
provided and you can create new ones.
Prepare
Start at the Beginning
2 On the upper-right side of the Animation Options dialog box, click Fit
to Current Animation.
NOTE This value is the total time available for all animation actions. To
increase (or decrease) the time, click Configure and specify the duration.
Summary
Change the animation length option to match the existing event duration.
634
26
Experienced Users
Time Required
40 minutes
Arbor_Press.iam
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
In Autodesk Inventor, you can evaluate various component positions in a
moving assembly by creating positional representations in the assembly
environment. You can use the positional representations within Inventor Studio
as keyframes in your assembly animations.
Objectives
Create and animate the positional representations of an assembly using
Inventor Studio.
635
Prerequisites
Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.
Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 636)
2 Click
, and then select Save As. Use
Arbor_Press_Rep_Anim.iam for the file name.
2 Right-click the Position folder, and select New to create a new positional
representation. The program creates the positional representation
Position 1 and sets it as the active positional representation.
3 Rename Position1 to Rest Position (0 deg).
4 Repeat the previous process to create two additional positional
representations named Middle Position (-45 deg) and Closed
Position (-160 deg).
NOTE To rename a browser node, slowly double-click the node to enter editing
mode, and then enter the name.
Currently, these three positional representations are identical. In the following
steps, you adjust them so that they contain different representations of the
assembly. You then use Inventor Studio to animate between these saved
positions.
Previous (page 636) | Next (page 638)
7 Click OK.
Previous (page 638) | Next (page 642)
Activate Studio
1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab Begin panel
Inventor Studio
NOTE In the Animation Timeline editor, the blue keyframes (parent) are action
segments that have child keyframes displayed in gray. You can adjust both the
parent and child keyframes. Child keyframes always fall within the parent keyframes.
NOTE To edit a segment with the Animate Positional Representation dialog box,
right-click the segment in the timeline and select Edit. Alternatively, double-click
the segment.
Previous (page 643) | Next (page 645)
2
This time, select the positional representation named Rest position (0
deg) from the Start field.
3 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the End field.
4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.
5 Enter a value of 2 in the Start field and a value of 4 in the End field.
6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box.
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned to:
Create named positional representations within an assembly by overriding
the value of a constraint.
Edit the start and end positions of animation events by dragging on the
timeline.
Skeletal Modeling
27
Experienced Users
Time Required
60 minutes
SkeletonBase.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
Build a skeletal model frame that supports a spherical tank. The frame is
associatively tied to the spherical tank. Adjust the size of the tank, and the
completed frame automatically adjusts to match the change.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various
view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching
and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return
to the previous one.
649
3 In the Model browser, drag the End of Part marker and drop it just
below the STRAP SURFACE node.
4 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel View Face,
and then click CIRC STRAP SKETCH in the Model browser.
A body profile that you will use to revolve a strap encircling the
sphere.
A surface profile used to create the strap surface feature. This feature
is used as a termination surface for supports between the strap and
the external frame surrounding the sphere. Further information is
provided when the supports are created later in this tutorial.
6 Drag the End of Part marker below the VERTICAL LEGS SKETCH
node in the Model browser. Use the View Face command to reorient
your view like the following image.
The sketch contains a profile for the square tubing leg. The 2240-mm
dimension is related to the diameter of the sphere. The size and thickness
of the tubing is controlled with user-defined parameters. The following
image shows the size of the tubing controlled by the TubeSize user
parameter. The user-defined parameters are exported, and thus can be
referenced by any of the parts derived from the skeleton part.
7 Drag the End of Part marker to the bottom of the Model browser.
Examine the remaining sketches. Note that all sketches are related
through projected geometry, work feature definition, or parameters. The
sphere diameter drives all the critical dimensions of the frame.
Previous (page 649) | Next (page 654)
Create an Assembly
Now you build a new assembly based on the skeleton part.
1 Start an assembly based on the Standard(mm).iam template.
2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create.
In the Create In-Place Component dialog box:
Enter Strap as the name of the new component.
Expand the Origin folder in the Model browser, and place the
component on the XY Plane of the assembly origin.
You may receive a warning that the base component will be modified.
It is fine. Click OK to allow the sketch to be exported.
7 If the Work Geometry icon is in a hybrid state (half yellow and half
gray), click the icon to change it to an Exclude state
TIP You can add features to the part as you can with any part created from
scratch. The derived sketch controls the size and position of the base feature
in this example. You can use Derived Component at any point in the
modeling process, not just as the first feature in a part. For example, a second
feature derived from the component might bring in a second sketch, It is
then used to add or subtract geometry from the first feature based on the
derived component.
13 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to the assembly
level.
14 Save the assembly. Use Skeleton.iam for the file name.
Previous (page 650) | Next (page 658)
1 - Extrude to workplane
2 - Profile
12 Expand SkeletonBase.ipt in the Model browser. Right-click Work
Plane - BOTT of Frame, and remove the checkmark next to
Visibility.
13 Finally, return to the assembly environment. Right-click Leg in the
Model browser and select Grounded from the pop-up context menu.
14 Save the assembly.
Previous (page 654) | Next (page 659)
Next, create the two different tube parts in the subassembly, using the
same skeleton technique you used previously.
Finally, place a second instance of one frame tube, and assemble it using
assembly constraints. The second instance of the tube is constrained to
the derived sketch in the layout part.
NOTE You incorporate the vertical leg in the subassembly later in this topic.
1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create.
In the Create In-Place Component dialog box:
Enter Frame as the assembly name.
2 Click OK.
3 Click the assembly origin XY Plane in the Model browser to align the
subassembly to the top-level assembly. The Frame subassembly is the
active component in the assembly.
4 Click Assemble tab Component panel Create. In the Create
In-Place Component dialog box:
Enter FrameLayout as the part name.
5 Click OK.
6 Align the part to the XY plane of the Frame subassembly origin. Because
it is the first part in the subassembly, it is grounded and aligned to the
subassembly origin.
7 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the
Model browser.
8 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part. Exclude all geometry other
than the FRAME SKETCH sketch. Your part should match the following
image.
NOTE Other geometry may be visible in your graphics window. You can
navigate the Model browser and turn visibility off for other geometry to
replicate the image as shown. However, this action is not necessary to
continue the tutorial.
11 Click OK.
12 Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam in the Model browser.
Click the XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the subassembly
origin.
13 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the
Model browser.
14 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part:
Exclude all sketches other than the FRAME SKETCH sketch.
15 Click OK.
16 Click 3D Model tab Create panel Extrude. Select the profile
highlighted in the following illustration.
1 - Profile to select
17 In the Extrude mini-toolbar, click the arrow next to the value input box
containing the 10 mm default extrusion distance. Select List
Parameters from the pop-up context menu. Click TubeSize in the
Parameters list.
18 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature.
19 Add a 5 mm fillet to the four long edges of the new part.
20 Click 3D Model tab Modify panel Shell. Select the two end
faces of the extrusion.
21 Click the arrow next to the Thickness edit box in the Shell dialog box,
and select List Parameters from the pop-up context menu.
NOTE With some additional work geometry in the skeleton model, you can
create the end profile for the horizontal tube, like the vertical leg tube. It
eliminates the need to add additional features to the part, but the additional
complexity of the skeleton model may outweigh that advantage.
24 Return to the Frame subassembly.
Previous (page 658) | Next (page 663)
Click OK.
1 - Profile
8 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and ground the DiagTube.ipt
part.
Previous (page 659) | Next (page 665)
4 Add a second Flush constraint between the end faces of the two tubes
as highlighted in the following image.
1 - Sketch Line
8 Turn off the Visibility of the FrameLayout part in the subassembly.
9 Save your work.
Previous (page 663) | Next (page 667)
Exclude all surfaces other than Srf2 from the derived part.
3 Click OK to complete the feature. Your assembly should match the one
in the following image.
You might be asking why the separate strap surface is required. Why not
create a solid body of the strap in the skeleton, and then derive the solid
body as a solid or surface body into the support part?
Notice that the strap surface feature is a single 180-degree revolved surface
that matches the outer surface of the strap. The support tube profile will
be extruded to this surface. If the termination surface provides more
than one solution, the maximum termination is always the result. See
the following image for an example.
You can choose a minimum or maximum solution for an extrusion
termination.
1 - Extrude
2 - Profile
9 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and then ground the
SupportLeft part.
10 Repeat the previous steps to create a right-hand support named
SupportRight. Derive the same sketch and surface into the new part,
and then extrude the other tube profile in the sketch to the termination
surface. The Frame subassembly should match the one in the following
image.
11 Expand the derived SkeletonBase feature under the SupportLeft and
SupportRight parts, and turn off the visibility of Srf2 to tidy up the
Model browser.
Click OK.
Assembly Update
The skeleton part controls all changes to the assembly components. In this
exercise, you change the sphere diameter in the skeleton part and examine
the changes in the assembly.
1 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt, or activate its window if the file is already
open.
2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab Parameters panel
Parameters. Scroll down to the User Parameters area in the
Parameters dialog box.
3 Enter 900 in the Equation cell of the SphereDiameter user parameter.
4 Click Done.
5 Return to the assembly file.
6 Click Local Update on the Quick Access toolbar. The assembly
changes to reflect the smaller sphere diameter. Your assembly should
match the one shown in the following image.
Summary
Skeletal modeling is an efficient and versatile technique for building assemblies
with Autodesk Inventor software. The application of this technique is limited
only by your imagination. The lack of assembly constraints and absence of
adaptive relationships can improve the performance and robustness of assembly
updates. Setting up a skeleton or master model takes some planning, but the
ability to control an assembly easily from a single source can be worth the
effort.
Previous (page 673)
iCopy: Creating
28
675
Use iCopy
Place iCopy results in a target assembly. Constrain the copies and determine
which components to copy or reuse.
Category
Experienced Users
Time Required
15-30 minutes
Tutorial Files
Used
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Learn how to
Place iCopy results
Copy/Reuse iCopy
Prerequisites
Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and
perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting
geometry.
Read the iCopy concept to understand the terms that are associated with
iCopy commands.
The iCopy command automates the process of copying and positioning similar
components in the main assembly. TheiCopy command creates one or
multiple copies of an iCopy template and adds each copy to the target
assembly. Each iCopy result can vary slightly from other iCopy results in the
pattern depending on the adaptivity that was defined in the iCopy template.
Creating an iCopy template is discussed in the Create iCopy Template tutorial.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 678)
To place a single iCopy result, you need a work point that corresponds with
each point defined in the iCopy template. To place multiple iCopy results,
you need a work point for each point in the iCopy definition. You also need
a rail to define the path for each work point, a work plane to define the
position of the iCopy results, and a path for the pattern.
1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. Open Target.iam located in
\Tutorial Files\iCopy.
2 The assembly contains a single part. The part contains sketch geometry
and work points. You use the work points to position iCopy results.
Previous (page 676) | Next (page 680)
iCopy
Use the iCopy command to position iCopy results. First, select the iCopy
template to use. Then select geometry to position, size and pattern the iCopy
results, and control the copy or reuse of components.
Constrain iCopy
In the Constrain iCopy dialog box, position the iCopy result in the target
assembly. Select work points to position the geometry. You can modify values
for any parameters included in the iCopy definition.
1 Select the Path pattern tab on the Constrain iCopy dialog box.
2 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the
Lower left point.
3 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right
point.
4 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left
point.
5 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper
right point.
1 Select
2 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern.
5 Click Next.
Previous (page 680) | Next (page 688)
4 Review the relationship between the template points and target points
and rail to see the effect these had on the results.Close the file. Do not
save changes. The Target.iam assembly is used later for the authoring
exercise.
Previous (page 688) | Next (page 692)
Summary
Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you:
Place iCopy results in a target assembly.
What Next? Now that you know what iCopy can do when placing results,
follow the Create an iCopy Template tutorial and learn how to build the
template for this powerful command.
Previous (page 688)
29
Use iCopy
Experienced Users
Time Required
45-60 minutes
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data
sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets
as instructed.
Learn how to
Create a skeleton assembly
Prerequisites
Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform
common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting geometry.
691
Review the iCopy Help Concept and familiarize yourself with iCopy terms.
2 This file contains several sketches, work geometry, and surface features.
Sketch1 contains the layout geometry for the skeleton model.
Sketch2 through Sketch7 contain the profiles used to create the frame
members.
Click Apply.
13 In the Label field, enter Upper right. Press ENTER to accept the input.
NOTE To remove a work point from the list, highlight the Geometry and Label
fields then press Delete.
Previous (page 696) | Next (page 700)
2 Select the Label field for FrameH and enter Frame Height.
3 Select the Label field for FrameW and enter Frame Width. Press ENTER
to accept the value.
4 Click OK.
5 Save the file. Click Yes to all if prompted.
6 CloseFrame.iam.
Previous (page 697) | Next (page 701)
3 Select Frame.iam in the Select Source Assembly dialog box. Click Open.
The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays.
4 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the
Lower left point.
5 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right
point.
6 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left
point.
7 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper
right point.
12 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy /
Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there are
no components to reuse in the iCopy definition.
13 Click OK to complete the command. The iCopy results are created as
shown. If the iCopy is not successful, return to the iCopy template and
review the steps to create it.
14 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for further
testing.
Previous (page 700) | Next (page 710)
Click
Verify that the New File Location is set to the \Tutorial Files\iCopy
directory.
Click OK.
4 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam and
select the XY Plane.
5 Exit the sketch and delete Sketch1. It is not needed for this component.
6 Click the Manage tab Insert panel Derive command.
7 In the Open dialog box, select Skeleton-frame.ipt and click Open.
8 Expand the Surface Bodies node. Set Srf1 and Srf6 to
other surfaces to
and all
and
11 In the Derive dialog box, click OK. The surfaces and sketch from
Skeleton-frame are added to the part. Using the Derive command to
add these surfaces maintains a link between the two files. The visibility
of Skeleton-frame.ipt is turned off for clarity in the following image.
Select Srf1 and Srf6 as the Between planes. The order does not
matter.
Click OK.
13 Turn off the visibility of the surfaces from the derived part (Srf1 and
Srf6). It prevents you from accidentally selecting them in later steps.
14 Return to the main assembly (Frame.iam).
Previous (page 701) | Next (page 713)
Surfaces
Sketch
Work Geometry
Frame2
Sketch3
Work Plane6
Frame3
Sketch4
Work Plane1
Frame4
Sketch5
Work Plane2
Frame5
Sketch6
Work Plane3
Frame6
Sketch7
Work Plane4
2 When all part files are complete, save Frame.iam and all dependents.
Previous (page 710) | Next (page 714)
components to the origin planes of the iCopy template layout part. This
procedure provides the most consistent results.
1 In the model window, click and drag any frame part. The part is not
constrained and is free to move.
2 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1
and Frame1:1.
3 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box,
Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush
option.
Click Apply.
3 Select Frame.iam in the Select Source Assembly dialog box. Click Open.
The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays.
4 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the
Lower left point.
5 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right
point.
6 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left
point.
7 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper
right point.
16 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that you
entered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off.
17 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful,
return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.
NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image,
click the
Local Update button on the Manage tab to update the
iCopy results.
18 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for further
testing.
Previous (page 714) | Next (page 726)
3 Select Frame.iam in the Select Source Assembly dialog box. Click Open.
The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays.
4 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the
Lower left point.
5 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right
point.
6 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left
point.
7 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper
right point.
17 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that you
entered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off.
The frame parts are copied for each iCopy result. Each iCopy result uses
the plate part.
18 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful,
return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.
NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image,
click the
Local Update button on the Manage tab to update the
iCopy results.
Summary
Summary | 737
What Next? Now that you know how to author and place iCopy components,
you can create your own. The Skeletal Modeling tutorial helps you
understand how to set up a skeleton assembly to use with the iCopy
command.
Previous (page 728)
30
Experienced Users
Time Required
30 minutes
739
Tutorial Files
Used
spline_1_start.ipt
spline_1_complete.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
This tutorial explores the tools available for creating and controlling the shape
of splines. Surfaces are used to shape the part and to define the body split
contours.
Objectives
In this tutorial, you learn how to:
Create and define splines.
Create surfaces.
Replace a face.
Prerequisites
Understand how to open, create and save part files in your active project.
System Settings
On the Application Options, Sketch tab enable the following settings:
Edit dimension when created.
The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment images
in this tutorial.
NOTE You can specify the icon color scheme in Application Options. The
appearance of the icons presented in this tutorial may differ if you are not using
the color scheme noted in the following image.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 741)
3 Right-click and select Done or press the Escape key to exit the command.
NOTE Fit points at the end of a spline are square. Fit points along the curve
are diamond shaped so you can identify the start and end of joined spline
segments.
When you create a spline, handles appear at each fit point in a passive
state. Handles are shape manipulators. You can drag or dimension to a
fit point without activating a handle. If the handles are not visible, select
a spline in the sketch to display the active and passive handles.
4 Activate the handle on all fit points. To activate a handle use one of the
following methods:
Press and drag anywhere on the handle.
TIP Enabling Curvature also activates the linear handle. Enabling the linear
handle does not activate Curvature.
Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point (not the
handle) and the part origin.
11
Orient the part to match the view in the following image and
start a new sketch on the indicated face.
Start a new sketch on the narrow end of the part on the face
indicated.
Start the Spline command and sketch a spline from the midpoint
of the projected vertical line to a point above the midpoint of the part.
Place the final point at the midpoint of the opposite projected vertical
line. Double-click the last point to create the spline.
4 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finish
the spline command.
5
Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point and the
midpoint of the projected line.
6 Place a 7-mm dimension from the midpoint of the top edge to the
middle fit point.
7 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finish
the dimension command.
Right-click the middle fit point and choose Flat from the
context menu. The mid-section of the spline now has zero curvature.
Although not required for this exercise, a unitless dimension can be
applied to the handle to extend the length of the flat segment.
3 Select the top planar face to satisfy the Existing Faces selection. Change
the selection to New Faces and select the lofted surface to satisfy the
New Faces selection.
The top of the part now conforms to the shape of the surface.
6
7 Specify a 2-mm thickness. Do not remove any faces. Use the default
Inside shell option.
8 Select OK to complete the operation.
9 Save the file.
Previous (page 747) | Next (page 752)
2 In the graphics window, select the top of the part to satisfy the selection.
3 In the dialog box, select Surface for the Output. Enter a distance value
of 3-mm. Use the flip direction arrow to offset the surface towards the
interior of the part.
6 On the Surface panel, click the drop-down arrow to expose all available
commands.
7 Select the Extend command in the drop-down.
8 Select the two outside edges of the offset surface to satisfy the Edges
selection. Specify an offset value of 7.5 mm. Click OK to finish the
command.
12 Click OK to split the part into two solid bodies and finish the command.
13 In the browser, turn off the visibility of the offset surface. Because the
extended edges are dependent on the offset surface, the originating
surface controls the feature visibility.
14 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. There are now two solid
bodies present in the file. You can control the visibility and color of each
body individually.
2 Orient the part view as shown in the following image with the wide end
of the part on the right.
3 Create a spline with five fit points as shown in the following image.
Double-click the last point to create the spline. It is of no consequence
if the handles on your spline do not match the image.
6 Enable all linear handles on the spline using one of the following
methods:
a Right-click and select Activate Handle in the context menu.
b Press and drag anywhere on a handle.
8 Place a vertical constraint on the handle at the midpoint and the two
endpoints.
13
14
7 Right-click each body in the folder and select Properties in the context
menu. Change the Body Appearance Style for each body to a unique
appearance
8 Save the file.
Previous (page 757) | Next (page 766)
Notice that the context menu also contains the Show All command to
unhide all bodies.
Previous (page 765) | Next (page 767)
2 In the dialog box, set the Output to Surface and pick the extruded
surface to satisfy the selection. Set the direction of the new surface to
the interior of the body. Set the Distance to 2-mm. Click OK to create
the surface.
5 Select the Trim Solid option; select the surface as the Split Tool. Make
sure the side to remove is pointing away from the material.
NOTE Rotate the model to verify the side to remove arrow is pointing away
from the solid. You can also select the second Remove direction and not the
one indicated in the following image. It is acceptable as long as the output
is correct.
8 In the Fillet dialog box, enter 2-mm for the Radius value.
9 Select the drop-down and set the fillet type to Smooth (G2).
Click the pencil icon to change to a selection mode.
10 Pick the upper and lower edges of the emboss feature, and then click
OK to create the fillets.
On the 3D Model tab, Plastic Part panel, click the Grill command.
4 On the grill sketch, select the large outer ellipse to satisfy the Profile
selection in the Boundary tab. Accept the default settings for size.
5 Select the Island tab and then select the small center ellipse to satisfy
the Profile selection. Accept the default of 0-mm.
6 Select the Rib tab and then select all the remaining line geometry to
satisfy the rib selection. Accept the size defaults.
Summary
In this tutorial you:
Created and dimensioned splines.
Summary | 781
782
Bolted Connections
31
Mechanical Design
783
Time Required
30 minutes
Bolted_connection.iam (metric)
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Objectives
Create and edit bolted connections with the Design Accelerator Bolted
Connection generator.
Prerequisites
Install and connect to the Content Center.
Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space with
the various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 784)
2 Click
Save As.
Connection
NOTE If your Content Center library does not contain the ISO standard, or
this particular bolt, select All from the Standard menu, and then select
a similar bolt.
4 Select the Click to add a fastener text, located directly under the bolt
thumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.
The generator logically filters the available selections. For example, when
you add fastener hardware between the bolt and the top hole, the
program presents only washers for selection.
5 Select the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower hole
thumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.
6 Click the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower washer
thumbnail, and then select ISO 4032. The fastener stack is complete.
7 Click Apply.
The File Naming dialog box opens where you can specify the Display
name of the bolted connection and the File name settings.
8 Remove the checkmark next to Always prompt for filename option,
and click OK.
7 Click OK.
Previous (page 790) | Next (page 800)
6 Click OK.
7 In the graphics window, right-click the cap screw contained in Bolted
Connection:2, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator.
Both the cap screw and the blind hole have grip handles. You can zoom
in to see the grips.
8 Drag the upper grip handle to change the length of the cap screw.
Notice that the cap screw preview snaps to the next available length
contained in the available Content Center libraries. In this example, the
next available length is 20 mm.
Notice also that the description text for the cap screw in the generator
dialog box updates immediately as you resize the cap screw.
Previous (page 795) | Next (page 805)
2 Click OK.
In addition to modifying the hole depth with a grip free-drag, you can
precisely define the hole depth.
3 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:2, and then select Edit
using Design Accelerator.
4 Select the lower hole thumbnail, and then click the access button next
to the hole thumbnail.
5 In the Modify Hole dialog box, enter 16 mm in the Hole Depth field
and 14 mm in the Thread Depth field.
6 Click the check mark to close the dialog box, and click OK in the
generator dialog box.
4 Click Termination.
5 Select the termination plane.
6 Click OK.
Though you can change the connection direction on the model, the
general top-to-bottom stack order of the hardware in the dialog box
remains the same. The screw is always the top-most item.
2 Select the thumbnail for the nut, and then click Delete to remove the
nut from the connection.
6 Next, change the type of the screw. Select the thumbnail for the cap
screw, and then select the menu button.
7 Select Socket Head Bolts from the Category filter menu.
8 Select ISO 4762.
9 Drag the grip for the cap screw to shorten the length to 20 mm.
10 Click OK.
Summary
Using the Bolted Connection Generator, you have learned how to:
Start a Bolted Connection.
Place holes.
Add fasteners.
32
Shafts
Design shafts.
Category
Mechanical Design
Time Required
40 minutes
819
In this tutorial, you create and edit a shaft with the Shaft Component
Generator and Design Accelerator.
Objectives
Design a shaft.
Check a shaft.
Insert a shaft.
Redesign a shaft.
Prerequisites
Install and connect to the Content Center.
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 820)
Overview
To create a shaft, you complete the following steps:
Start the Shaft Component Generator.
NOTE In this tutorial, you will insert components from the Content Center. Make
sure that you have Content Center installed before you start designing the shaft.
Previous (page 819) | Next (page 821)
On the Quick Access toolbar, click Save, and save a copy of the
file as shaft.iam.
The shaft also dynamically previews within the graphics window, according
to the shaft features and values you specify in the dialog box. You can design
a shaft by adding or deleting sections and features, or by adding loads and
supports. When you add loads and supports using commands on the
Calculation tab, the preview of loads and supports appears.
3 Click
Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. The program adds
a plain shaft section to the right of the selected element.
The first Cylinder section becomes red in the tree control. The Shaft
Generator recognizes that you have a fillet between two sections of the
same width next to each other, which is not supported. The program
changes the section back to the default color when you change the width
of one of the shaft sections.
Specify Parameters
To change the size parameters for the shaft section, you can use one of the
following editing methods.
1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the shaft section.
, or double-click the
3 In the Edit dialog box, enter a new length value of 50 mm, and then
click
5 In the Edit dialog box, enter new length value of 65 mm, and then click
. The diameter of the section changes.
7 Now, add a through hole to the selected shaft section. In the tree control,
the third shaft section is activated. Click the arrow next to
to
expand the list of available features for this shaft section, and select Add
Through Hole.
The default hole is added to the selected section. To edit the hole, select
it in the tree control, and click the
8 In the Through Hole dialog box, change the Hole Diameter value to
12 mm. Ensure that you change the value for the Hole Diameter
parameter, not the Main Diameter parameter.
9 Click OK.
1 Click
Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. A plain shaft section
is added to the right of the selected section.
4 Add a retaining ring feature to the selected shaft section. Click the arrow
next to
to expand list of available features for this shaft section,
and select Add Retaining Ring from the list.
The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section.
5 Click
to display the Retaining Ring Groove dialog box to edit the
parameters.
6 In the drop-down menu, select Measure from second edge to insert
the retaining ring on the right side of the cylinder section.
7 Use the second drop-down list to select DIN 471 from the Content
Center.
8 Set the Distance to 2 mm, and click OK.
4 Change the Section Length field to 140 mm, and click OK.
You can use the drag method to reorder templates within the library.
NOTE The 2D preview is on by default. To hide the 2D Preview, select the Always
Hide option within the 2D Preview box of the Options dialog box, and click
OK.
Previous (page 835) | Next (page 836)
Specify Supports
When you switch to the Calculation tab, notice how the 2D and 3D Previews
change. Not only the graphical representations of loads and supports are
displayed, but there are also green and blue position markers.
For each section, the program shows three position markers: one at each end
of a section, and one position marker in the middle of each section. A blue
position marker means that load or support is positioned on such a position
marker.
NOTE Supports are represented by triangles. Loads are represented by arrows.
1 Select Supports from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supports
region.
2 Press and hold the Alt key. In the Autodesk Inventor window, drag the
support to the second shaft section from the left as shown on the image.
The nearest blue position marker indicates that the support is positioned
towards it.
NOTE The position marker can be half-blue and half-green if it is between
two sections.
3 Double-click the support to display the Free Support dialog box, and
change the Distance from middle of section field to 1.5 mm, which
is the distance from the currently active position marker to the support.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Autodesk Inventor window, press and hold the Alt key, and then
drag the second support indicator to the shaft section located on the
right end of the shaft, as shown.
3 Select Torque from the displayed list. The Torque dialog box opens.
Enter 200 N m in the Torque field, and click OK.
4 In the toolbar, click
Torque to add a second torque. In the Torque
dialog box, ensure that -200 N m is entered in the Torque field, and
click OK.
NOTE The sum of all torques must equal 0.
5 You can also change positions of the torques. In the dialog box preview,
drag the torque arrows to the shaft sections as shown in the image.
6 Click the Calculate command. Expand the Results area on the right
side of the Calculation tab to see the calculated results of the loads,
supports, and values.
7 Switch to the Graphs tab to view the diagrams of individual shaft
loadings.
If the Always Prompt for Filename option is selected, when you place
the completed shaft in the graphics window, the File Naming dialog box
appears. You use this dialog box to specify the display name and File name
for Design Accelerator components and features. For this exercise, do not
select this option.
Previous (page 838) | Next (page 840)
2 Ensure that the Design tab is activated, and then select the cone section,
as shown.
Summary
Using the Shaft Component Generator, you learned how to:
Start a Shaft Generator.
Configure a shaft.
Insert a shaft.
Edit a shaft.
Summary | 843
844
33
845
Mechanical Design
Emphasis
15 - 20 minutes
SpurGear.iam (metric)
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Design a spur gears connection using the Design Accelerator Spur Gears
Generator. Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that
saves extensive assembly and part modeling.
Objectives
Specify placement of gears.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 846)
Spur Gear.
Design Accelerator generators open in the last valid state a component
was inserted into the Autodesk Inventor assembly.
NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Spur Gear command to load
the Spur Gears Generator with the default installation data.
Previous (page 845) | Next (page 847)
Common
This area includes parameters common for both gears, such as module or helix
angle.
The Design Guide drop-down menu contains five possible options of design
and calculation. Based on your selection of the design guide, the edit fields
within the Design tab are enabled. Every method requires different input
parameters.
Gear 1, Gear 2
This area includes parameters that can vary for Gear 1 and Gear 2 such as
number of teeth or face width. Also, commands for placement specification
of Gear 1 and Gear 2 are located here.
Use the drop-down menu to select the type of gear to insert: component,
feature, or no model.
More Options
Results
Double-click the double line on the right, or click the chevron to display the
Results pane with the list of calculated values. The values in gray indicate that
results do not match the inserted values in the Design tab. Click Calculate
to get results for current inputs.
2 Click the
More Options command located in the lower-right
corner of the Design tab for additional options for spur gears.
3 On the Size Type group box, select Module.
If you design spur gears in a metric assembly, the generator selects the
Module option by default. If you design spur gears using English units,
the generator selects the Diametral Pitch option.
4 In the Input Type area, select the Number of Teeth option. In this
case, the number of teeth is an input parameter.
5 In this tutorial, you insert one feature and one component. Select
Feature from the drop-down menu in the Gear 1 group box. The first
gear is inserted as a feature of the shaft in the assembly.
NOTE The diameter of section on the shaft must be equal or greater than
outside diameter of the gear.
3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within the
assembly.
4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the following
image.
3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within the
assembly.
4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the following
image.
Enter Parameters
Now, you can enter parameters into the Common, Gear 1, and Gear 2 group
boxes.
1 Set Pressure Angle value to 20 degrees.
2 Set Helix Angle value to 12 degrees.
3 Enter the correct number of teeth. Your gear design is based on these
known parameters. Enter 29 into the Number of Teeth edit field in
the Gear 1 area.
4 Enter 57 into the Number of Teeth edit field in the Gear 2 area.
5 Set both Facewidth values in Gear 1 and Gear 2 to 30 mm.
6 Set Unit Correction in Gear 1 area box to 0.
Previous (page 856) | Next (page 860)
In the File Naming dialog box, you can specify the Display name and
File name for Design Accelerator components and features. When the
Always prompt for filename box is checked, the dialog box opens
every time you insert the Design Accelerator component or feature.
4 Click OK to insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.
Summary
Place components.
V-Belts Connections
34
Mechanical Design
Time Required
15 minutes
VBelts.iam
863
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Create and edit a V-belts drive using the Design Accelerator V-Belts generator.
Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that saves
extensive assembly and part modeling
Objectives
Design V-belts driven with two pulleys.
Design a belt.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 864)
NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the V-Belts command to load the
V-Belts Component Generator with the default installation data.
Previous (page 863) | Next (page 865)
When you select the work plane, the grips display. The number of displayed
grips depends on the number of pulleys.
NOTE The V-belts Generator opens with the last valid settings.
Previous (page 864) | Next (page 867)
NOTE In this Autodesk Inventor version, the V-belts Generator is not connected
to the Content Center.
Previous (page 865) | Next (page 868)
NOTE When you start the V-belts Generator, there are always two pulleys displayed.
To add other pulleys, click the Click to add pulley text.
3 Select the cylindrical face of the shaft to position the first pulley
automatically.
The sliding is available along the selected sliding work plane. The program
determines the final pulley position according to available belt length.
Place Constraints
1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Position panel Constrain.
2 Constrain the second pulley axis to the shaft axis using the Mate
constraint.
The following image shows the correct selection of the constraint for
the second pulley axis.
Summary
Design a belt.
35
Bearings
Category
Mechanical Design
Time Required
15 minutes
877
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Create and edit a bearing connection using the Design Accelerator Bearing
generator.
Objectives
Select bearings from Content Center according to specific criteria.
Insert a bearing.
Prerequisites
Install and connect to the Content Center.
Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space with
the various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 878)
Bearing.
NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Bearing command to load
the Bearing Generator with the default installation data.
Previous (page 877) | Next (page 879)
The bearing that matches the inserted criteria appears in the lower part
of the Design tab.
Tips
To narrow your selection, you can select Standard when you choose
bearings from Content Center.
To narrow bearing selection, you can enter filter values for bearing dimensions.
It is not necessary to do so in this tutorial, because previously you selected
the cylindrical face in the assembly, and the appropriate Inside Bearing
Diameter (Shaft Diameter) range values were inserted into the second row
of filter edit fields. These filter edit fields appear on the right side of the Design
tab.
In this tutorial, we use the ANSI Standard, which usually offers one bearing
for one Inside bearing diameter. In the lower part of the Design tab, only
one bearing appears.
To narrow the selection:
1 In the first row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearing
outside diameter.
2 In the third row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearing
width.
NOTE You must enter both filter values. They can be identical.
Previous (page 882) | Next (page 883)
2 Click the Update command to update the list of bearings that match
the filter criteria.
Previous (page 882) | Next (page 883)
Select Bearing
When the bearing list is updated, a list of bearings that match the criteria
appears in the lower part of the Design tab. In this tutorial, only the SKF ALS
15 bearing displays in the list; however, you must still select it.
1 Move your cursor over the row containing the bearing.
Bearing.
2 In the right side of the Design tab, click the arrow
second From field.
next to the
The program inserts the Inside bearing diameter value (2 in) into the
From field.
5 To insert the end value, enter 2 in the To field.
2 Click the icon to select the Angular Contact Ball Bearings category.
A list of the bearings matching the inserted criteria are displayed in the
lower part of the Design tab.
3 Select the ALS 16 bearing.
The name of the selected bearing displays in the field above the list.
Previous (page 885) | Next (page 887)
4 Select the bearing from the list near the bottom of the dialog box.
5 Click OK to insert the second bearing into assembly.
6 Save the assembly.
Summary
Insert bearings.
Disc Cams
36
891
Mechanical Design
Time Required
20 minutes
Cam_Spring.iam
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you design and edit cams using the Design Accelerator Disc
Cam Generator.
Objectives
Design a disc cam.
Set a file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Accelerator
component.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 893)
Disc Cam
You can set segment length by dragging the segment end in the graph
area.
Adding Segments
Though you do not add or delete segments in this tutorial, this page describes
how to do so.
Click Add After in the Actual Segment area to add a new segment after
the currently selected segment.
Click Add Before to add new segment before the currently selected
segment.
The Zoom command switches on or off the zoom to the cam element
graphs only.
The Save graph data to file command saves all graph data and
data about cam profile and follower path to the tab-delimited text file.
0.1
0.028
0.2
0.104
0.3
0.216
0.4
0.352
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.648
0.7
0.784
0.8
0.896
0.9
0.972
3 In the Actual Segment region of the cam generator, click Add new
user motion.
4 Enter a motion name.
5 Browse to, and select, the .TXT file you created.
6 Click OK to add your motion to the list of motions. Each user motion
appears with the
icon.
TIP To delete a user-defined motion, select the motion and then click Delete.
Click OK.
Previous (page 898) | Next (page 900)
Place Constraints
1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Position panel Constrain
.
2 In the Assembly tab of the Place Constraint dialog box, select the
Tangent
3 Save the assembly. You use this assembly in the Compression Springs
tutorial.
Previous (page 900) | Next (page 902)
Summary
In this tutorial, you used the Design Accelerator Disc Cam generator to create
and edit cams.
Set the file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Accelerator
component.
Summary | 903
904
Compression Springs
37
905
Mechanical Design
Time Required
20 minutes
Cam_Spring.iam
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you create compression springs using the Design Accelerator
Compression Spring generator.
Objectives
Design a compression spring.
Prerequisites
Complete the Disc Cams tutorial.
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 907)
.
The Compression Spring Generator opens in the Design tab by default,
with the last valid settings.
We recommend that you create a disc cam using the disc cam tutorial
before you design a compression spring, so that your assembly is
complete.
2 Select Start Plane. Orbit the assembly and select the start plane of the
top retainer as shown on the image below.
NOTE When you click the spring reference image at the top of the Design tab,
a schematic image with the basic spring dimensions opens.
The program shows results on the right side of the Calculation tab.
The inputs that fail the calculation appear in red (their value does not
correspond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of
the calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area, which
appears after you click the chevron in the lower-right part of the
Calculation tab.
5 Click the
Results command in the right upper corner to open
the HTML report.
6 Click OK.
Previous (page 912) | Next (page 915)
Summary
Summary | 917
918
38
Weldments
Build weldments.
Category
Mechanical Design
Time Required
50 minutes
Welding.iam (metric)
919
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you build a weldment from an assembly.
The weldment file is a variation on the assembly template and opens with the
Weld tab active. You can also use any of the other assembly tabs and
commands.
You use the welding feature groups (Preparations, Welds, or Machining) to
add assembly-level features and fully define your weldment.
Objectives
Add weld preparation features.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various
view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching
and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 920)
Features added in the three groups act at the assembly-level only. They do not
appear in the individual parts and subassemblies.
The following image shows weld and machining features in a weldment
assembly.
The weldment features exist in the weldment assembly only and do not affect
the part files.
You activate the various weldment feature groups with the Weld tab or
through the Model browser. To do this, you must first open a Weldment file.
1 Set the active project to tutorial_files.
2 Click New
on the Quick Access toolbar. Ensure that you click
the icon itself, and not the associated drop-down menu.
3 To ensure that you complete this tutorial using a metric template file,
click the Metric tab displayed along the top of the selection area of the
dialog box.
4 Double-click the template file Weldment (ANSI - mm).iam.
Open an Assembly
Two different workflows can be used to create a weldment. You can:
Use a weldment template to create an empty weldment into which you
then place components and welds.
In this exercise, you open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.
1 Click Open
on the Quick Access toolbar, and then open
Weldments Welding.iam.
2 Click Zoom All on the Navigation bar to fit the model in the window.
Weld Types
You can create three types of weld features: fillet, groove, and cosmetic welds.
Cosmetic weld features, the preferred type, are represented by graphical
elements. You can represent a wide variety of weld beads as cosmetic welds,
including fillet welds and various groove welds.
Weld preparations are not required for cosmetic welds. The weld symbol
contains the weld preparation required for the selected edges.
Cosmetic weld features do not affect mass properties, and the application does
not consider them during interference analysis.
You can also create 3D fillet welds.
The weld is a true 3D feature in the assembly.
TIP Limit the use of 3D fillet welds to specific cases that require functionality not
available in cosmetic welds.
Previous (page 924) | Next (page 926)
NOTE You may need to use the Select Other command to select the two vertical
edges.
Previous (page 925) | Next (page 927)
2 Click OK.
NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identify
the field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window
is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the
cursor.
The program represents a cosmetic weld with a bright orange line. The
weld symbol is attached to the cosmetic weld.
NOTE Your weld symbol may not appear exactly as shown in the previous
illustration.
Weld Extents
You can control the length of single edge welds by specifying two parallel
faces or work planes.
1 In the Model browser, right-click the START WELD work plane, and
select Visibility.
2 Repeat for the END WELD work plane.
3 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit.
TIP If you select the wrong edge, press the Ctrl key and deselect the edge.
Previous (page 928) | Next (page 930)
6 Click Return.
7 Turn off the visibility of the two work planes.
NOTE Your weld symbol may not be visible following creation, or it may not
appear like the previous illustration. If it is not visible, orbit the model until you
can see the symbol. You can click the symbol, and then drag the green grips to
resize the symbol leader or move the symbol along the weld.
Previous (page 930) | Next (page 931)
For a 3D weld, you select sets of faces on two different components. The
program creates the weld at the common edges of the faces.
3 Click the channel face adjacent to one of the cylindrical plates.
1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then remove the checkmark
from Symbol Visibility. The program hides the weld symbols in the
graphics window.
Alternatively, expand the Welds node and switch the visibility of
individual weld symbols.
2 Click Return
Add a Hole
1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab Preparation and Machining
panel Hole.
2 In the Holes dialog box, select Concentric from the Placement
drop-down menu.
3 Select the top face of one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates.
4 For the circular reference, select the circular edge of the cylindrical plate.
5 Highlight the 3-mm dimension in the Diameter field, and then enter
33 mm as the hole diameter.
6 Select Through All from the Termination drop-down menu.
7 Click OK.
The hole feature cuts through the two hole plates and the channel.
NOTE You can add extrude cuts, chamfers, and hole features in both the
Preparations and Machining weld groups.
Previous (page 934) | Next (page 936)
2 Click the top face of the brace highlighted in the following figure.
Geometry.
4 Click the edge highlighted as shown.
Circle.
2 Move the cursor over the midpoint of the projected line, and then click
when the green midpoint symbol appears.
3 Move the cursor away from the center point, and then click again to
define the radius of the circle.
The exact size of the circle radius is not important. Use the circle in the
following figure as a guide.
panel Extrude.
The program selects the circle profile.
2 Select All from the Extents drop-down list in the Extrude dialog box.
The program previews the cut, which should look like the image below.
4 Click OK.
The cut affects the two components and the weld bead.
Feature Rollback
The three weldment groups represent time-dependent processes in the creation
of a welded assembly. Features from a subsequent process cannot appear when
an earlier group is active. For example, machining features do not appear
when the Welds group is active.
1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then select Edit from the
pop-up context menu.
The program rolls back the model to the welding state and removes the
two machining features.
2 Click Return.
In the weldment assembly environment, all weld group features are
visible.
As welded.
3 Select All Components from the View pane on the Component tab.
4 Ensure Machining is selected from the Weldment list on the Model
State tab.
5 Select 1/2 from the Scale list.
6 Click Top in the Orientation list.
7 To complete the base view, click to the right of the existing views.
The machining features appear in the drawing views based on the welded
state of the assembly.
Previous (page 942) | Next (page 944)
3 To reposition and reorient the symbol, you can click a weld symbol and
then drag the green grips.
Previous (page 943) | Next (page 945)
Add a Caterpillar
You can add cosmetic weld entities to drawing views in place of, or to improve
the documentation of, cosmetic model welds. You can add weld caterpillars
and weld end treatment geometry to any drawing view.
1 On the ribbon, click View tab Navigate panel Zoom
Window.
2 Zoom in on the front view of the as-welded assembly, as shown in the
following figure.
Caterpillar.
2 Click the five line/arc segments highlighted as shown.
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Create a weldment from an assembly.
39
949
Mechanical Design
Time Required
60 minutes
Tutorial File
Used
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Parts fabricated from sheet metal are commonly required in designs. Autodesk
Inventor provides functionality that simplifies the design, editing, and
documentation of both the finished folded model and flat patterns associated
with sheet metal parts.
Objectives
Create a simple sheet metal guard working within the context of the
Cylinder Clamp assembly that was used in the Assemblies tutorial.
Prerequisites
Complete the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials.
Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the
Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 952)
Get Started
In the first portion of this tutorial, you will create a simple sheet metal guard.
You create the guard in the assembly using projected geometry and
measurements of assembly components. This workflow ensures that the guard
will be sized correctly.
There are other ways to start a design. Before you begin the steps of the tutorial,
lets review a typical workflow that produces a similar model:
The guard that you are going to create must fit over the base. By creating the
sketch for a Contour Flange feature on the face of Cylinder Base.ipt, you
can use the geometry of that part while defining your sketch profile geometry.
4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create,
or right-click and select Create Component from the marking menu.
5 Enter my_2mm_guard in the New Component Name field in the Create
In-Place Component dialog box.
Following the selection of the face shown, an empty sketch within the newly
created sheet metal file displays. Next you create a simple open profile sketch
to use to create a Contour Flange as the base feature of your guard.
Previous (page 952) | Next (page 956)
While creating a part within an assembly, you are able to see and reference
the other parts in the assembly. By default, when you reference geometry in
another part, you get an associative relationship to that part. If the original
part changes, the geometry that you created also changes to honor the
association. In this tutorial, you use an option to reference the geometry
without creating the associative reference. In situations where you are certain
NOTE Holding down the Ctrl key while projecting geometry breaks the associative
link that would normally be obtained.
Next, you create a simple, three-line sketch that represents the inside faces of
the Contour Flange. It will create the basic shape of the guard.
Previous (page 954) | Next (page 958)
NOTE Complete the Sheet Metal Styles tutorial (when you have time) to
understand the inter-relationships between the Materials, Sheet Metal Rules, and
Sheet Metal Unfolding Rules. By correctly establishing a set of Sheet Metal Rules
for your work, and ensuring that these rules are set as the default in your Sheet
Metal.ipt template, you will be able to begin sheet metal design projects without
editing the Sheet Metal Defaults each time you start a new part design.
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet
Metal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from
the marking menu.
2 Take note of the following items:
Name of the Sheet Metal Rule
8 With the Contour Flange dialog box active, adjust your view (using either
the View Cube or Orbit) to see the side of the model as follows:
Next, you change the flange creation direction and measure an existing edge
to complete the creation of the Contour Flange.
Previous (page 958) | Next (page 963)
the menu.
3 With the Measure option active, click in the graphics window to
measure the length of the edge shown. Use the measured value as the
Distance value for the Contour Flange.
The sheet metal Contour Flange is the base feature in the model file that you
created working within the assembly context. The sheet metal part displays
as solid while the other components within the assembly display as translucent.
By working within the assembly context you were able to use existing critical
dimensions without initially knowing their values. Next, you add a sheet
metal Flange feature with automatic mitering around three edges along the
back side of the guard.
Previous (page 960) | Next (page 965)
command provides flexibility in the position and size of the flange relative
to the selected edge and other features within the evolving model.
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Create panel Flange,
or right-click and select Flange from the marking menu.
2 In the graphics window, click to select the three inside edges shown.
As you select the edges, the Flange feature previews. Note that Flanges created
from co-planar edges automatically miter at corners that would otherwise
interfere. You can access the Auto-miter option from the Corner tab of the
Flange dialog box.
NOTE For this Flange, be certain to select the three inside edges.
By default, sheet metal Flange features are created using the Bend Position
option labeled Inside of bend face extents. This produces a Flange face
coincident with the selected edge. In this case, such a Flange would not allow
clearance for the corners of Cylinder Base.ipt. Instead, you will change the
Bend Position to Bend from the adjacent face, which uses the selected
edge as the beginning location of the bend for the Flange.
3 Click the Bend Position option labeled Bend from the adjacent
face.
NOTE As you click this option, notice that the preview of the three Flange
faces moves out from the selected edges. To see this change more clearly,
display the model as Wireframe (View tab Appearance panel
Wireframe from under the Visual Style drop-down menu), and view
the model from the Top. Switch between Inside of bend face extents
and Bend from the adjacent face (be certain to return to Bend from
the adjacent face, then reset your display to Shaded and reset your
view angle, before continuing).
4 For this Flange feature, use the default value of 90 degrees for the Flange
Angle, as well as the default value of 25 mm for the Height Extents
Distance.
5 Click OK to create the Flange and close the Flange dialog box.
Next, you create a sketch containing center marks for punched holes.
Previous (page 963) | Next (page 968)
NOTE If you have not already cleared the Autoproject edges for sketch
creation and edit application option as specified in the tutorial
Prerequisites, this sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorial
will have unnecessary projected geometry.
2 If necessary, adjust your view normal to the sketch using the View Cube
or the View Face command. Click View tab Appearance panel
Shaded with Hidden Edges from the drop-down menu under
Visual Style. Use this orientation and display to see edges of other
components within the assembly. Your view should appear as follows:
This projected circle provides the location for a sketched Center Point.
It locates a Punch feature (used to provide clearance for the pin), as well
as the alignment for two additional Center Points that will be used to
8 Place three sketch points at the ends of the two construction line
segments.
9 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click
and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment.
NOTE You can optionally continue to work with a hidden edge display. The
remaining illustrations in this tutorial show a shaded display. To return to a shaded
display, click View tab Appearance panel Shaded from the drop-down
menu under Visual Style.
Now that you have sketched Center Points, you will next place two
different-sized Punch features to provide clearance for the pin and holes for
mounting screws.
Previous (page 968) | Next (page 973)
Punch Holes
While there are several ways to create circular holes in your sheet metal part,
using a round Punch feature provides you with annotation benefits when you
detail the flat pattern of your design.
NOTE This tutorial uses an example Sheet Metal Punch iFeature that contains the
two punch sizes required by this tutorial. The IDE file that contains this punch is
located in the default project folder that is active when the tutorial_files project
is active. To learn more about Sheet Metal Punch iFeatures, please review the Skill
Builders posted to: http:\\www.autodesk.com\inventor-skillbuilder These sheet metal
Skill Builders can be found by clicking on the Parts heading.
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Punch
Tool.
2 The Punch Tool Directory dialog box opens. By default, it displays Punch
Tools that are stored in the Punches folder, which is located in the
Catalog folder under the default installation folder. Click Workspace
in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directory
dialog box to switch to the Tutorial Files folder.
3 Select Cylinder Clamp metric_hole.ide, and click Open to display
the Punch Tool dialog box.
4 The example file includes punches of two different sizes; however, the
2.5-mm diameter punch is previewed on the three center points in the
displayed and unconsumed sketch. While the 2.5-mm diameter punch
is needed on two of the center points, you must first clear the center
point that will be used for the 12-mm punch. While holding the Shift
key, move your cursor over the center point as shown, and click to clear
the center point.
5 Click Finish in the Punch Tool dialog box to place the 2.5-mm diameter
punch on the remaining two center points and close the dialog box.
Next, you follow a similar set of steps to place the 12-mm diameter punch.
11 Click Finish to place the 12-mm diameter Punch iFeature and close the
Punch Tool dialog box.
12 Right-click the shared sketch node in the Model browser (the node
above the first iFeature node), and click Visibility to remove the check
mark and hide the shared sketch geometry.
Next, you mirror the punched holes.
Previous (page 973) | Next (page 976)
To complete the folded model of your guard, mirror the three punched holes
to the face on the opposite side. The Mirror functionality requires a plane to
mirror across, and due to the steps used to construct this part, you cannot
simply use one of the origin planes.
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Work Features panel
Plane and select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the
drop-down menu.
2 In the graphics window, click the outside face shown in the following
illustration:
3 Now, rotate the view and click the outside face on the opposite side. The
new work plane is created midplane between the two outside faces.
The mirrored features now appear on the opposite side of the guard.
Because you are working within a sheet metal part that is active within
an assembly, the sheet metal part file will be opened in isolation, and
the flat pattern will be created.
2 Double-click the Folded Model icon at the top of the Model browser
to return to the folded model.
NOTE Alternatively, you can also click Flat Pattern tab Folded Part
panel Go to Folded Part to return to the folded model state.
3 Click Save.
4 Close the copy of the my_2mm_guard file that was opened.
5 Double-click the Cylinder Clamp.iam node at the top of the browser
to return to the assembly.
6 Click Save to save the assembly.
7 Close the assembly.
Next, you add both a bend and punch table to a partially completed drawing
of the guard.
Previous (page 976) | Next (page 981)
4 Click to select the flat pattern view as the source view for the General
table.
NOTE The General table type provides column selections unique to the type
of source view selected. In this case, the table provides bend information.
5 Click OK in the table dialog box to accept the default selections, close
the dialog box, and place the table.
6 Move your cursor over the upper-left corner of the drawing border. When
your cursor changes to indicate a point on constraint, click to place
the table.
A table is created with columns for Bend ID, Bend Direction, Bend
Angle, and Bend Radius using the values for each of the bends in the
selected view. Also, notice that the Bend ID numbers have been added
to the flat pattern view near the bend centerlines.
The bend sequence identified is not likely to match the sequence your
fabrication shop uses. Modifying the bend order sequence and adjusting the
table is covered in the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial.
Next, you place a punch table on the drawing.
Previous (page 979) | Next (page 983)
4 Click to select this point as the datum for dimensioning the punched
holes.
5 Move the displayed outline of the table to align it with the lower-left
corner of the drawing boarder. When the point on constraint is
indicated, click to place the table.
6 Right-mouse click over the table, and select Edit Hole Table from the
context menu to display the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box.
Summary
Summary | 985
In this tutorial, you learned a basic workflow for creating a sheet metal part
and placing sheet metal annotations on a flat pattern drawing. Some key
points of this exercise include:
Working within the context of an assembly, you were able to use assembly
geometry to define key design aspects of your sheet metal part.
Sheet metal features are often created on one side or the other of a selection
to take into account the material thickness or bend radius.
Sheet metal Punch iFeatures simplify the creation of simple and complex
cut (and formed) features on your model. Punch iFeatures carry attribution
that can be recovered in a Punch table on your drawings.
The flat pattern of your folded model is easily created and provides an
accurate representation of the flattened bend zones between adjacent
features. The size of these flattened bend zones are determined by the
Unfold Rule defined within the active Sheet Metal Rule used when you
begin a new sheet metal model from a template.
40
Mechanical Design
987
Time Required
60 minutes
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Create a lofted flange feature, and then rip and flatten it. Work with the flat
pattern to explore many sheet metal features.
Objectives
Lofted flange features
Rip features
Prerequisites
Complete the tutorial Sheet Metal Parts.
Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the
various view tools.
Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the
Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 989)
Notice the material thickness now previews to the inside of the profile.
9 Click OK in the Lofted Flange dialog box to accept the edits you have
made, create the Lofted Flange, and close the dialog box.
Because you selected two closed profiles to create this Lofted Flange, the model
will not currently create a flat pattern.
Next, you add a Rip feature to allow the model to flatten.
Previous (page 989) | Next (page 994)
Rip
Like its physical counterpart, a folded sheet metal model that forms a
continuous tube-like shape cannot be flattened. The Rip feature provides an
easy way to create a cut in a face of the model that will allow the flat pattern
to be produced.
To create a Rip feature, you select a face of the model and (optionally) either
one or two points that lie on the selected face. If you select an outside face,
any points selected must be on an edge of the outside face. Optionally, you
might select an entire face to be removed.
TIP In this exercise, the point used to locate the Rip feature was added to one of
the Lofted Flange profile sketches. Another technique is to create a 2D sketch on
a flat face of a Lofted Flange targeted for Press Brake output. Then place a point
at a strategic vertex or edge midpoint.
1 In the Model browser, click the + to the left of Lofted Flange1.
Right-click Sketch2, and select Visibility in the context menu to make
Sketch2 visible.
2 Adjust your view of the model so that the edge of the sketched square
which contains the point is visible on top.
Rip | 995
5 Select the point you previously created that defines the location of the
single-point Rip.
Rip | 997
NOTE The Rip can cut a bend face adjacent to the selected face; however,
a rip cannot cut across a bend face and through a second face. In this
example, if the point was located anywhere other than the midpoint of the
edge, the rip could not be created.
6 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the
dialog box.
7 In the Model browser, right-mouse select Sketch2, and click Visibility
in the pop-up context menu to switch off Sketch2 visibility.
Previous (page 993) | Next (page 998)
Rip (continued)
The previous Rip feature exercise directed you to create a sketch point to serve
as the rip point. While the creation of sketch points are required for certain
rip workflows, there are many instances where sketch points are not necessary.
Inventor also accepts work points, midpoints on edges, or endpoints on face
vertices as valid rip point selections.
Now, you will delete the rip feature and try creating it once again. But this
time, you will use the midpoint on the top edge of the 600mm x 600mm
square as the rip point.
1 First, make sure that the Sketch2 visibility is turned off as previously
directed.
2 Next, right-click the Rip node in the Model browser and select Delete
from the pop-up context menu. Your model should appear as shown.
5 Next, move your cursor to the midpoint of the top edge. When the
midpoint appears, click to select.
7 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the
dialog box.
Next, you will create a flat pattern of the ripped Lofted Flange.
Previous (page 994) | Next (page 1003)
Now that the Lofted Flange has had a Rip feature applied it is no longer a
continuous closed shape. It is now possible to create a flat pattern suitable for
manufacture.
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Flat Pattern panel
Create Flat Pattern.
The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and the bend extent lines
which indicate the bend zones required to flatten the lofted flange.
NOTE You can easily add a Rip feature to a lofted flange created from two
closed profiles and generate a valid flat pattern. Your manufacturing shop
may prefer to fabricate this type of part as two pieces.
Using this flat pattern, you next explore Bend Order Annotation.
Previous (page 998) | Next (page 1005)
As you can see, these numbers do not currently have a logical sequence:
Directed Reorder
1 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Directed Reorder from
the pop-up context menu.
The Directed Reorder method of applying bend sequence overrides
requires that you select a beginning bend and an ending bend. The
system applies a new bend order sequence between the selected bends.
Also notice that the numbering sequence has been changed. The bend
you selected as the starting position is now numbered 1. The remaining
bends are numbered in sequence to the bend that you selected as the
ending position.
Sequential Reorder
If you were happy with the sequence you obtained, you can right-click and
select Done, then right-click again and select Finish Bend Order.
Alternatively, pressing Esc twice is equivalent to selecting Done and Finish
Bend Order from the pop-up context menu.
Since this is an exercise, you will not keep the directed sequence that you
created.
1 Right-click, and select Remove All Overrides from the pop-up context
menu. Notice that the green squares revert to yellow circles and the
numbering sequence returns to the initial sequence generated by
Autodesk Inventor.
2 Right-click again, and select Sequential Reorder from the pop-up
context menu.
Use sequential reordering to pick bends manually in the order that you
need them to be manufactured.
3 Beginning again with the upper-most bend, click every other bend. As
you click a bend, notice that the yellow circle again changes to a green
square. The numbers change to correspond to the selected sequence.
Click two or three more bends until you get the feel of this technique.
NOTE If you did not clear the Autoproject edges for sketch creation
and edit application option, as specified in the Prerequisites at the
beginning of this tutorial, the sketch and all subsequent sketches made in
this tutorial will have unneeded projected geometry.
2 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Sketch panel Create
2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking
menu.
3 Click OK in the dialog box that displays the message Edits to the flat
pattern are exclusively applied to the flat pattern and will
not be reflected on the folded model.
4 Sketch two straight lines as shown:
NOTE In this example, the size and position are not critical so dimensions
will not be applied. In your designs, you will likely want to apply dimensions
to position these lines accurately.
5 Click Sketch tab Exit panel Finish Sketch, or right-click and
select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.
Next, you convert the sketched lines to cosmetic centerlines.
Notice that the displayed bend attributes of the sketched lines now match
the displayed bend attributes of the other bend lines on the flat pattern.
4 Change the Bend Angle value to 3 degrees in the Cosmetic
Centerlines dialog box.
5 Click OK in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to create the cosmetic
centerlines using the specified attributes and close the dialog box.
Notice that the sketched lines now display using the Bend Centerline
linetype. Using the techniques learned in the Bend Order Annotation exercise,
click Flat Pattern tab Manage panel Bend Order Annotation,
or right-click and select Bend Order from the marking menu. Notice that
the cosmetic centerlines now participate in the bend order sequence.
These cosmetic centerlines can now be included in bend tables and bend notes
you create in your drawings.
6 Click the Esc key to exit Bend Order Annotation.
7 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab Folded Part panel Go
to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the
marking menu, to return to the folded model state.
8 You can Save your exercise file; however, the file is not used in further
exercises.
9 Close the file that you have been using for these exercises.
Next, you will add Contour Roll features to a supplied sheet metal part.
Previous (page 1012) | Next (page 1017)
Contour Roll
NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you recently
completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you have undisplayed the
sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require
the use of the sketch grid and may be completed with the grid displayed or
undisplayed.
Next, you project edges into the sketch.
Previous (page 1015) | Next (page 1019)
NOTE The Contour Roll feature will transform sharp sketch corners into bends in
the finished part using the bend radius value. This behavior is like the Contour
Flange feature and is not apparent in the following exercise.
1 If necessary, orient your sketch using the View Cube or View Face so
that you are looking at the sketch plane.
2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project
Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the
marking menu.
3 In the graphics window, click to select the lines and arcs that define the
outside edge of the Contour Flange feature as shown:
NOTE Be sure to select individual lines and arcs rather than the face loop of
the detail faces.
4 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Line, or right-click and select
Line from the marking menu.
NOTE The length of this line is not important; however, the line should be
parallel to the short, horizontal line segments that you projected into your
sketch. You can either imply the parallel constraint as you draw the line or
add a parallel constraint after the line has been drawn.
5 Click OK to create the 30-degree Contour Roll segment and close the
dialog box.
Next, you repeat these steps with a few minor differences to create a similar
Contour Roll that sweeps 30 degrees in the opposite direction.
Previous (page 1019) | Next (page 1023)
2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal
material, and then add a straight line segment. This straight line segment
should be on the side of (and parallel to) the long horizontal projection
and offset by 100 mm. For the previous contour roll, the axis of
revolution was on the side of the two short horizontal segments. By
putting the axis on the opposite side of the profile, the revolution will
curve in the opposite direction when you create this contour roll.
4 Click OK to create the second 30-degree contour roll segment and close
the dialog box.
As a final modeling step, you will use the same sketch and project edges
technique to create a sketch to use for a second contour flange.
Previous (page 1022) | Next (page 1026)
The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and bend extents for the four
90-degree bends that form the square tube, It also displays as the two roll
centerlines for the two 30-degree rolls created by the Contour Roll features.
Bend centerlines, bend extents, roll centerlines, and roll extents are all exported
to separate layers when a flat pattern is exported to DWG or DXF formats to
facilitate flexibility in CNC manufacturing.
In the final portion of this tutorial, you explore the use of the Unfold and
Refold feature. You unroll and unfold the model that you created, adding
some features and then refolding and rerolling the model.
Previous (page 1026) | Next (page 1030)
NOTE Alternatively, you can also double-click the Folded Model node in
the Model browser to return to the folded model state.
2 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the pop-up context
menu (or press F6) to change the view to an isometric orientation.
3 Click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Unfold. The Unfold
dialog box displays, and two stationary reference planes appear at either
end of the Contour Roll features.
4 In this exercise, we first unroll the Contour Roll features. Click in the
graphics window to select the lower stationary reference plane.
Once you select a stationary reference, the rolls that can be unrolled
relative to that reference are highlighted.
Next, you continue with additional Unfold selection steps.
Previous (page 1028) | Next (page 1032)
As you select faces, the preview shows the model state that results by
unrolling the selection.
Once the second rolled face is selected, the model again previews the
unroll results.
3 Click Apply in the Unfold dialog box to straighten the model as shown
in the preview and to reset the dialog box for the next round of unfolds.
Next, you unfold two of the 90 degree bends which form the square tube.
Previous (page 1030) | Next (page 1036)
As soon as you select the face shown, the bends that can be unfolded
relative to that face highlight:
2 Click to select the bend which forms the 90-degree corner closest to you:
Once the bend is selected, the part previews in the unfolded state.
2 Click OK in the Unfold dialog box to flatten the two bends as shown in
the preview and to close the dialog box. Your model should now appear
as shown in the following image.
Although these steps are not required to add the holes (that you will add next)
they illustrate adding an Unfold feature to flatten straight bends.
Notice that your feature browser now contains two Unfold features: one for
the unfolding of the two contour rolls and one for the unfolding of the two
straight bends.
Next, you add a hole and pattern the hole so that it crosses the (now flat) faces
of the Contour Roll features.
Previous (page 1036) | Next (page 1044)
Add a Hole
1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab Sketch panel Create
2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu.
Then select the face shown in the following image.
2 Reorient your view, if necessary, using the View Cube or View Face
commands, so that you are looking directly at the sketch.
3 Click Sketch tab Draw panel Point. Drag over the projected
origin point, and then up. You should see the dotted line which indicates
that the point you will place is aligned with the origin point.
Summary
The features you explored in this tutorial represent powerful additions to your
sheet metal modeling skills.
Transitional shapes defined by selecting two profiles for a Lofted Flange
feature are common in some sheet metal design situations.
The ability to define the output of a Lofted Flange targeted at either a Press
Brake or Die Form manufacturing process provides flexibility in both design
and manufacturing.
The ease of adding a Rip feature to a Lofted Flange created from two closed
profiles provides for ease of flat pattern creation during the design process.
Certain features are easier to create while the model is flat: Unfold and
Refold features allow efficient creation of these features while showing
them correctly in both the final folded model and the flat pattern.
What Next? As a next step, consider exploring the creation of Lofted Flange
features with two open profiles. Or, create a variation of the folded and rolled
square tube with cut features that cross over both the 90-degree square corner
bend as well as the 30-degree rolled faces. You can also explore the capabilities
of the Inventor Studio environment which was used to create several of the
photorealistic images that were used in this tutorial.
Previous (page 1048)
Summary | 1051
1052
41
1053
Mechanical Design
Time Required
25 minutes
electrical box.ipt
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you capture and manipulate the following sheet metal
characteristics using sheet metal styles:
Complete material definition
Various style types, or style categories, control sheet metal characteristics. The
style types, when taken together, create a composite style that determines the
characteristics of a sheet metal part. You can apply styles locally to the active
part, or you can save new styles and style edits to the Style Library to share
the styles.
Objectives
Create new styles.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various
view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching
and extruding.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 1056)
1 Click
Manage Projects.
2 The new material can be made from an existing one. In the library
section, if not already selected, select Inventor Material Library.
3 In the library list, on the right, scroll to locate Steel - Mild. Double click
the material in the list.
The material is added to the document and opened in the Material Editor.
4 In the Material Editor, change the material name to Steel - Test.
5 Before continuing, in the Asset section, select the structural asset. Note
the properties making up the material listed in the pane below. When
making new materials you can modify some properties, others are
determined by the material Type and Class to which the asset is assigned.
In addition, the new material is not currently saved in the part file. If
you close the part without saving, this new material is lost.
Previous (page 1056) | Next (page 1057)
The browser on the left side of the Styles and Standards Editor lists
three style types or style categories:
Lighting
Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material | 1059
6 Right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test in the browser, and select
Active from the pop-up context menu.
If you receive an error message, click Accept. The error is not critical in
this exercise.
7 Click Save in the Style and Standard Editor dialog box.
If a message box displays, click Accept.
The program applies the bend radius and corner relief style attributes to
the part.
Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief | 1061
8 Click Done.
TIP In the tutorial, click Undo and Redo on the Quick Access toolbar
to see the effects of the style changes. Be sure to redo all changes before
continuing.
9 Save the part to prevent the new styles from being lost. The new styles
are now preserved locally in this part.
Previous (page 1058) | Next (page 1062)
2 In the Save to Library? column, set Sheet Metal Style Rule Test
to Yes.
3 Click OK. The program notifies you that the operation overwrites styles
in the library.
4 Click Yes.
Any style marked Yes is saved to the Styles Library. They can be shared
from part to part, and shared with anyone who has access to the project.
TIP You can also save styles to the style library in the Style and Standard
Editor. Right-click a style in the browser, and select Save to Style Library.
5 Save and close the part.
Previous (page 1060) | Next (page 1063)
. You can
6 Accept the default dialog box settings, and then click OK.
Next, you add two flanges.
7 Click the Flange command from the ribbon or the marking menu.
.
8 Select two adjacent edges.
9 Click OK.
The default template uses the default sheet metal styles. Next, you use
Sheet Metal Defaults to apply the new styles to the part.
TIP If you routinely use a certain style set, create a sheet metal part template that
uses those styles by default.
Previous (page 1062) | Next (page 1065)
Metal Defaults
, or right-click and select Sheet Metal
Defaults from the marking menu.
Because you saved the styles you created to the Style Library, they are
available for application in this part.
2 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Sheet Metal
Rule Style Test.
6 For confirmation purposes, you can use the commands on the Tools
tab, Measure panel to run a couple of checks.
The sheet thickness is 0.105 in, as specified in Sheet Metal Rule
Style Test.
The bend radius is 0.121 in, per the style specification of Thickness
* 1.15 (0.105 * 1.15).
In addition, the corner is square, per the Sheet Metal Rule Test
Style.
2 Click the Edit button next to the Sheet Metal Rule menu.
3 Select the Corner tab, and then change the Relief Size value to
Thickness * 4.
4 Click Save. The program applies the style change to the part.
Update Styles
On the previous page, the edit you made to the Rule Style Test style was
only applied locally (the active part). To make the edit available globally, save
that style to the Style Library.
1 In the Style and Standard Editor, right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style
Test (under the Sheet Metal Rule node in the browser) and select
Save to Style Library in the pop-up context menu.
2 Click Done to close the editor.
3 The edited and globally saved style is not picked up automatically by
parts that share the style. Update that style in any other part that uses
the style.
4 Close the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box.
5 Openelectrical box.ipt.
TIP Select the file from the Recent Documents section of the Application
menu.
6 Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Update
.
7 In the Update Styles dialog box, set the Update? column for Sheet
Metal Rule Style Test to Yes.
8 Click OK.
A message appears stating that the library style definition will overwrite
local style edits.
9 Click Yes. If a message box displays, click Accept.
The edit that you made to Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (the change
in corner relief size) is applied to this part.
10 Closeelectrical box.ipt.
Previous (page 1069) | Next (page 1071)
Pattern
Summary
Summary | 1073
42
Frame Generator
Mechanical Design
Time Required
55 minutes
1075
Tutorial Files
Used
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you create structural frame assemblies in a standards-based,
automated fashion with Frame Generator.
First you use a predefined skeletal model consisting of unconsumed sketches
to determine the placement and extent of frame components, such as square
tubing and c-channel. Then you fit those components together with miters
and cuts.
Finally, you use a hybrid model consisting of a solid and sketches to place the
frame components. The Frame Generator process saves extensive assembly
and part modeling.
Objectives
Select and position frame components.
Prerequisites
Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various
view tools, and work with components in the assembly environment.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 1077)
Get Started
Frame Generator uses frame members contained in the Content Center. To
begin, set your active project, and then verify that Content Center is installed
and configured.
1 Click
Manage Projects.
Skeletal Model
This tutorial uses a skeletal model to position and create frame members.
Create an assembly and place the skeletal model.
1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam
template.
2 Place one occurrence of frame_generator.ipt located in the Frame
Generator folder into the assembly.
This part consists of one 2D and one 3D sketch that together define the
sample skeletal model. You use this part model to define the placement
and extent of frame components in the assembly.
3 Save the assembly using Skeletal.iam for the name.
Previous (page 1077) | Next (page 1079)
Insert Profile
The Frame Generator commands are located in the Frame panel of the Design
tab. We start by inserting frame members on the four upright lines.
1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Insert Frame
.
2 Select ISO from the Standard menu.
3 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu.
4 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.
5 Select the upright sketch line as shown in the image. Ensure that you
select somewhere on the upper half of the line. The position of the frame
member is partially dependent on which half of a given line you select.
6 The tube previews as shown in the image. Select the other three upright
lines.
NOTE To remove a line from the selection, press and hold Ctrl and then
select the line again, or select the profile preview.
Previous (page 1077) | Next (page 1081)
Profile Orientation
By default, the tube profiles are centered on the selected sketch lines.
1 Click the middle radio button to the right of the profile preview image.
The profile preview in the graphics window shifts position relative the
sketch line to match the position of the orientation indicator.
Create Profile
We must make one last adjustment to the orientation before creating the
frame members.
1 Click the arrow next to the Angle field, and then select 90.00 deg from
the menu.
2 Click Apply.
3 Click OK in the Create New Frame dialog box.
The Frame Member Naming dialog box displays. This dialog box is used
to change member display names, member file names, and locations.
4 Click OK without making changes.
Whenever this dialog box appears in the tutorial, click OK without
making changes in the dialog box.
NOTE If you press Cancel during the frame member naming, the frame
members are created using the default names.
The profiles are created, and you can continue to make other profile
selections.
The preview shows the profile is upside down (relative to the design
intent for this model).
2 Click Apply.
Previous (page 1087) | Next (page 1091)
3 Click Apply.
Previous (page 1090) | Next (page 1094)
6 Click Apply.
Previous (page 1091) | Next (page 1097)
5 Click Apply.
6 Click Cancel to close the Insert dialog box..
Previous (page 1094) | Next (page 1098)
Lengthen Profile
The c-channel on top of the taller vertical members must extend to the outside
edges of the tubes (plus an additional 15 mm on each end to allow for a fillet
weld).
1 Zoom in on the model, as shown (upper portion of one of the tall vertical
members).
Lengthen/Shorten
3 In the Lengthen - Shorten Frame Member dialog box, click Both Ends.
7 Click Cancel.
Notch Profile
Next, we fit the tube within the c-channel using the Notch command.
5 Repeat these steps for the notch cut on the other vertical member at the
opposite end of the c-channel.
6 Click Cancel.
7 To see the notches clearly, turn off the visibility of the c-channel. In the
Model browser, right-click the c-channel, and then remove the check
mark next to Visibility.
3 Orient the model view as shown in the following image to see how the
miter options affect the miter joint.
NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for
clarity.
2 Click Apply.
4 Select the lower tube, and then select the upper tube.
5 Click Apply.
The joint is offset 5 mm, but only the lower tube is offset from the joint
midplane.
6 This time, select the upper tube first, and then the lower tube.
7 Click Apply.
The first component selected is the component offset from the joint
midplane.
Treatments
panel.
3 Click Cancel.
NOTE The miter offset type is not important for this example.
Trim Profile
Next, we remove the excess material from the lower c-channels.
1 Orient the model view as shown.
NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for
clarity.
.
3 First, select the trimming component, which is the tube.
5 Click Apply.
Cut Profile
Now, remove the excess material from the angle braces using existing faces
as the cutting plane.
1 Orient the model view as shown.
.
3 First, select the component to cut, which is the square tube.
4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.
5 Click Apply.
If desired, you can set the view to Wireframe display, and orbit the
model to more clearly see the cut results. Return to Shaded display
when finished.
In the remaining steps, we cut the other side of the tube using the same
method.
6 Select the tube, click the Face command, and then select the face, as
shown.
7 Click Apply.
Profile Information
Use the Frame Member Info command to view characteristics of a frame
component.
1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel Frame Member
Info
Change Profile
Use the Change command to make various edits to a selected component.
The Change command uses the same dialog box as the Insert Frame
Members command and allows modification of any of the properties in the
dialog box.
Load Calculation
You can use the Beam/Column Calculator to determine how loads affect
the design.
Calculator
Refresh
You can publish your own frame shapes to Content Center or modify existing
Content Center families and templates. Use the Refresh command to update
existing frames after the Content Center has been modified.
to
Refresh | 1119
Parameters
Hybrid Skeleton
In this exercise, we start a new assembly and place a component that contains
a solid and unconsumed sketches. This component is used as the skeleton for
our frame. We use Frame Generator to add frame members around the solid
and sketches.
1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam
template.
2 Place frame_generator_hybrid.ipt into the assembly.
.
3 Select DIN from the Standard menu.
2 Click Apply.
3 Change the graphics display to the Shaded visual style.
The inside surfaces of the channel must be flush with the outer surfaces
of the existing channels.
4 Enter -10 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.
5 Click Apply.
NOTE Since the orientation of the channels for each vertical edges is
different, we place the channels one at a time.
Previous (page 1123) | Next (page 1129)
Lengthen Profile
In our design, the vertical members must be flush with the upper and lower
channels. We must lengthen the vertical members to meet this criteria.
1 Orient the model view, as shown.
Lengthen/Shorten
3 Select the vertical channel. Make the selection near the top of the
channel.
NOTE When you lengthen one end of a component, the end closest to your
cursor when you select the component is the end that is lengthened.
4 Ensure the One End command is selected.
Currently, the end of the vertical channel is flush with the inner surfaces
of the upper channels. The width of the channels is 40 mm. Therefore,
the extension distance is 35 mm.
5 Enter 35 mm in the Extension field.
6 Click Apply.
7 Repeat this process for the other end of the vertical channel, this time
using 5 mm for the lengthen distance.
8 Repeat this process for the upper ends of the remaining three channels.
It is not necessary to adjust the lower ends of the remaining channels.
9 Close the dialog box when finished.
Previous (page 1129) | Next (page 1132)
is selected. Enter 2 mm in
6 You can repeat this process for the remaining seven junctions, but it is
not required for this tutorial.
7 Close the dialog box when finished.
Previous (page 1130) | Next (page 1135)
.
2 Select DIN EN 10219-2 (Circular Hollow Section - Cold Formed)
from the Family menu.
3 Select 26.9x3 from the Size menu.
4 Enter -3 mm in the Vertical Offset field.
9 Click Apply.
6 Click OK.
.
2 Select the four tubes, as shown.
3 In the Trim - Extend To Face dialog box, click the Face command, and
then select the face as shown.
Lengthen Profile
First, we must lengthen the support tubes so we can notch them to meet the
other tubes.
1 On the ribbon, click Design tab Frame panel
Lengthen/Shorten
2 Select the tube as shown.
Notch Profile
Now that the support tubes extend past the other tubes, we can notch the
supports to fit the mating tubes.
4 Click OK. The lower tube is notched to fit the upper tube.
.
3 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu.
4 Select S 35 x 5 from the Size menu.
5 Select the Insert Members Between Points option.
6 Select the start point. This point is the corner vertex on the skeletal
model.
12 Use this procedure to add another brace on the other side. Change the
value for the angle to 180.00 deg, and click the Mirror Frame
Member command.
13 Click Cancel when finished.
Previous (page 1145) | Next (page 1152)
.
3 Select the angular braces.
4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.
5 Click Apply.
6 Select the angular braces again.
7 Click the Face command.
8 Select the cutting face.
9 Click Apply.
10 If you like, you can repeat this procedure for the other end of the braces.
Previous (page 1147) | Next (page 1155)
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Select and position frame components.
Summary | 1155
Replace components.
Summary | 1157
1158
DWG Data 1
43
1159
Data Exchange
Time Required
10 minutes
eBox2.dwg
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Import two layers from a multiple layer DWG file to create a simple extruded
part.
Prerequisites
See the Help topic Getting Started for further information.
The imported layers contain the geometry and the dimensions that define
the sketch you use to create the extruded part.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
The part opens in Sketch mode, where the 2D Sketch commands are available
and the sketch grid displays, if turned on.
2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import
Options dialog box opens.
3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to each
layer, except the p and p dim layers.
4 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field.
5 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog
box. Activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometric
constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box.
6 Click Finish to close the dialog box. The program imports geometry
and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.
3 Drag the gold distance manipulator until the value 0.075 appears
in the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter .075 directly in
the box.
4 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and exit the command.
2 In the graphics window, click and drag the zoom indicator down the
screen to zoom in on the extrusion.
NOTE If your system zooms out when you drag down, it is likely that this
option was selected during installation. You can easily change the zoom
direction of the drag and mouse wheel (at any time): on the Display tab
of the Application Options dialog box select the Reverse direction option.
If you have been using AutoCAD for some time you may be more comfortable
using the AutoCAD zoom direction preferences.
3 Click the following image to play the animation.
4 On the navigation toolbar, click Free Orbit
5 In the graphics window, click and drag inside the orbit indicator to orbit
the part.
6 Right-click, and then select Done [Esc]. The exact position of the part
is not important.
7 Press F6 to orient the part in the default home view.
Previous (page 1163) | Next (page 1166)
3 Click
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Use existing DWG geometry to define a sketch profile.
Use the skills you learned in this tutorial to create a more complex part in the
next tutorial, DWG Data 2.
Use the table of contents to the left to start the DWG Data 2 tutorial.
Previous (page 1167)
Click here to return to the tutorials home page
DWG Data 2
44
1169
Data Exchange
Time Required
15 minutes
eBox2.dwg
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
Import two different layers from the same DWG file. Create the cover for an
electrical panel from the DWG geometry.
This tutorial draws on skills you learned in part 1 of this tutorial set.
The cover consists of a base extrusion, a fillet, and a shell. You use the existing
geometry and dimensions from the DWG file to create the part features in
Autodesk Inventor.
Prerequisites
Complete Part 1 (DWG Data 1) of this tutorial set.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
Next (page 1171)
In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then
Import DWG
1 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import
Options dialog box opens.
2 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the p
and p dim layers, and then check the c and c dim layers.
3 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field.
4 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog
box. If not already enabled, activate the Constrain End Points and
Apply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the
dialog box.
5 Click the Finish button to close the dialog box. The program imports
the geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.
3 Select the .560 dimension value (the full depth of the cover) in the "top"
view of the inserted geometry.
5 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature that will become
the electrical panel cover and exit the command.
6 Press F6 to position the part in the Home view.
Create a Round
Next, you create the rounded edge on the outside of the cover. You reference
existing dimensions to determine the radius for the round, just as you did to
create the base extrusion.
1 In the Model browser, click the expand/collapse symbol next to
Extrusion1.
. You can also right-click and select Fillet from the marking
menu.
5 Select the edge loop on the front of the cover (the edge opposite the face
with the sketch).
6 Highlight the default Radius value in the value input box in the
in-canvas display, or in the Fillet dialog box. Select the .110 dimension
value found on the lower left corner of the front view of the sketch
geometry.
7 Click the green Ok button to create the round and exit the command.
Create a Shell
1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab Modify panel Shell
.
2 Use Orbit to approximate the view shown in the following image. The
exact orientation is not important.
3 Use the Shell command to hollow out the model while maintaining a
specified wall thickness. You can remove faces of the model that will be
open after completing the command.
4 Select the face with the sketch.
Notice that because you created the round before the shell, the program
creates the inner fillet automatically as part of the shell operation.
7 In the Model browser, right-click the Sketch1 browser node and remove
the check mark next to Visibility to turn off the display of the sketch.
8 Save the part, using cover_panel for the file name.
9 Close the part.
Previous (page 1176) | Next (page 1186)
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Import layer-specific DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. Then
create an Autodesk Inventor solid model of the ACAD drawing views using
the actual DWG geometry and dimensional values.
Use and refer to the imported DWG data to determine feature dimensions.
Use the Visibility option on browser objects to ease your design process.
Summary | 1187
1188
DWG Data 3
45
1189
Data Exchange
Time Required
15 minutes
Create the box portion of the electrical panel within the context of the
assembly. Use specific layers of the supplied 2D DWG file to define the Inventor
solid part geometry.
At the assembly level, insert the panel and cover parts you created earlier. Use
assembly constraints to position the parts relative to one another.
This tutorial draws on the skills you learned in parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial
set.
Objectives
Create part models in the context of an assembly.
Prerequisites
Complete Parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set.
Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the
various view tools.
Navigation Tips
Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or
return to the previous one.
7 Select the XY Plane. This selection aligns the new part origin with the
assembly origin in your empty assembly file.
Once you select the origin plane, the program creates and names the
part document. The assembly browser updates to show the new part and
that you are working within the sketch of the newly created box part
file. The sketch commands are active and you can begin to define the
geometry for the first extrusion.
8 If necessary, click the Front face of the View Cube to set the sketch
plane parallel to the screen.
NOTE The colors of your sketch lines could be different from the image.
Differences in color are not important for this tutorial.
Previous (page 1192) | Next (page 1194)
Extrude Geometry
1 Press E on the keyboard to activate the Extrude dialog box.
Like the previous tutorial, you must select each of the regions inside the
6 x 6 rectangle. In this case, there are three.
2 To make the selection of the first region easier, click Zoom Window
Create Rounds
Next, you create rounds on the two edge loops of the front and back faces. As
before, you refer to dimensions contained in the imported sketch to determine
the size of the rounds.
1 In the browser, expand the part feature named Extrusion1.
2 Right-click Sketch1, and then select Visibility.
, or right-click and
5 Select the front edge loop of the cover (the edge opposite the face with
the sketch).
6 Highlight the Radius value in the Fillet dialog box, or in the value input
box in the in-canvas display, and select the 0.110 radius value that was
defined by the designer who originally created the DWG drawing.
Create Shell
Like the cover part, this part must be hollowed out, or shelled. However, unlike
the cover part, you do not remove any faces from the part during the shell
operation.
1 Click the Shell command.
2 Highlight the default value in the Thickness field.
3 Select the 0.060 wall thickness value in the right-side view of the sketch,
which is still displayed in the graphics window.
4 Click OK to create the shell. Because the shell removed only interior
material, there is no apparent change to the part.
3 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, select To Next from the
drop-down menu. If you are using the mini-toolbar, select To next
face/body from the drop-down menu.
4 In the Extrude dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar, click Cut.
Within the selected region of the box part, you should see a direction
indicator pointing to the inside of the box. The indicator shows the
direction of the cut extrusion. Though dim, the direction indicator is
visible in the highlighted portion of the image.
5 To see the indicator more clearly, click the Flip Direction button in
the dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar.
6 Click the other Flip Direction button. Ensure the indicator points to
the inside of the box.
7 Click OK to create the cut. Because you selected To Next from the
Extents menu, or To next face/body from the mini-toolbar, the cut
terminates on the next face it encounters. In this case, it is the back face
of the box.
Assembly Environment
1 In the Return section of the tab, click Return
. This action
returns you to the top-level assembly environment from the part
environment. Assembly commands replace the part commands.
It is within this assembly environment that you add and constrain the
panel and cover parts that you created earlier.
2 Before you continue, save the assembly. Use eBox for the file name, and
then click Save. If prompted to save eBox.iam and its dependents, click
OK.
Previous (page 1201) | Next (page 1209)
You use these planes to attach, or constrain, the panel and cover parts
to the box part.
NOTE Your origin planes could be a different color.
Previous (page 1208) | Next (page 1210)
Add Parts
Next, you add the panel and cover parts you created in the first two tutorials
to the assembly.
1 In a blank area of the graphics window, right-click, and then select Place
Component from the marking menu.
NOTE Do not right-click over the box which would invoke the context menu
for a selected component.
The Place Component dialog box displays. You are viewing the contents
of the Tutorial Files folder.
2 Find and select the panel part you created in the first tutorial, and then
click Open.
3 The panel is attached to your cursor. Click anywhere in the blank space
around the existing box part to place one occurrence of the panel. Do
not attempt to place the panel within the box.
After you click, notice that another occurrence of the panel is attached
to the cursor and ready for placement.
4 Since you only need one occurrence of the panel, press Esc to end the
Place operation.
5 Use the previous steps to find and place one occurrence of the cover part
you created in the second tutorial.
Unconstrained Parts
You placed the panel and cover parts; however, they are not in their final
positions. You use assembly constraints to locate the parts with respect to one
another. Typically, you need three constraints to position a part.
Currently, the panel and cover parts are unconstrained and are free to move
in 3D space. Click and drag the cover part. Notice that the part moves with
your cursor, and the part remains at whatever location you release the mouse.
Click in the following image to play an animation that shows dragging the
cover part within the assembly.
Previous (page 1210) | Next (page 1213)
Grounded Parts
Now, attempt to drag the box part. This part does not move, and your cursor
changes to the push-pin, grounded symbol.
Autodesk Inventor always grounds the first part placed into an assembly to
provide a fixed, foundational part to which you can constrain other parts.
You can specify that any part is grounded or not grounded. You can also
specify that the first part placed is not grounded. But the best practice is to
select a strategic, foundational part for the first part placed, and then leave it
grounded.
Previous (page 1212) | Next (page 1213)
Any constraint type requires that you select geometry on two parts. In the
next step, you place a mate constraint between the top face of the panel part
and the inside back face of the box part.
1 Click in the following image to watch the animation, and then select
the face of the panel, as shown.
The selected face highlights and the direction indicator shows the
constraint vector.
2 Click the following image to watch the next animation and then select
the inside back face of the box part as shown.
By default, Place Constraint previews the constraint automatically.
It is only a preview and the constraint is not yet complete.
3 In the Offset field of the Place Constraint dialog box, change the default
value to 1 in to move the panel 1 inch away from the inside back face.
4 To finalize the constraint, click Apply. The mate constraint is created
and the panel is offset one inch from the back of the box.
The Place Constraint command remains active and ready for the next
constraint set.
Previous (page 1213) | Next (page 1214)
2 In the graphics window, select the YZ plane of the panel (click the
following image to watch an animation of this selection).
3 Select the YZ plane of the assembly (click the following image to watch
an animation of this selection).
4 Click Apply to create the constraint.
NOTE In the constraint that you created, no physical geometry existed for
either selection. It is important to consider the part and assembly origin
geometry when creating your part models and when constraining them in
assemblies. Parts should be created symmetrical about the origin when it
makes sense. Otherwise a principal face should be coincident with one of
the origin planes. Use care when selecting the first part placed into an
assembly and its position relative to the assembly origin.
Previous (page 1214) | Next (page 1215)
3 Select Mate in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.
5 Select the inside face of the cover. Click the following illustration to see
how the constraint previews.
6 Click Apply to create the constraint. The inside face of the cover is
mated to the outside face of the box.
2 Click Flush in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.
The constraint now previews (click the following illustration to see the
preview).
3 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The cover is
fully positioned.
Previous (page 1219) | Next (page 1222)
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to:
Build upon the skills you learned in the previous tutorials in this set by
importing, using, and referring to DWG geometry in part sketches and
part features.
The next logical step in the workflow suggested by this set of tutorials would
be to document your design with an Autodesk Inventor drawing. You can use
the table of contents to the left to start the Drawings tutorial and learn how
to prepare final drawings.
These tutorials focused on using existing DWG geometry to build a set of three
simple parts and to put them together in an assembly. To increase your general
familiarity and comfort with Autodesk Inventor, you may find it useful to
work through some, or all, of the other tutorials. To access the tutorials from
the ribbon, select Get Started > Learn about Inventor > Tutorials.
Summary | 1225
1226
46
Alias to Inventor
Translate an Alias file to an Inventor part file and explore the association.
Category
Data Exchange
Time Required
20 minutes
Keyboard.wire (original)
Keyboard.ipt
Keyboard.wire (revised)
1227
NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions athttp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial
data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the
datasets as instructed.
In this tutorial, you open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it as an
Inventor part (.ipt) file in Autodesk Inventor. You also reassociate an edited
Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file.
Envision an engineering environment in which a standard keyboard design
was created as a surface model by an industrial designer using Alias. The Alias
geometry is translated into Autodesk Inventor and becomes an Inventor part
file (.ipt). Additional design enhancements are made to the keyboard part file
using Autodesk Inventor modeling commands.
Meanwhile, the industrial designer continues to modify the Alias design into
a more organic, ergonomic shape. Because there is direct associativity between
Alias and Autodesk Inventor, the part file is easily updated to reflect the new
ergonomic design when the modifications to the Alias surface model are
complete.
Objectives
Derive and exclude surfaces.
Prerequisites
Have a basic understanding of the Derived Part functionality.
Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the
various viewing tools.
Observe that four node names appear in the dialog box: Body, Keys,
Logo, and Tools. The layer icon appears just to the left of the four node
names because they represent the layer names of the surfaces which were
in Alias.
The top three commands in the Status area at the top of the dialog box
remain inactive until you select one of the nodes from the list. Use these
commands to select the layer as a composite surface or all surfaces
individually. You can also exclude some (or all) surfaces.
Use the + command at the far left to derive all the surfaces as a composite
surface. It is the default condition. A composite surface appears in yellow
and can be stitched into a solid. Most of the Autodesk Inventor modeling
commands, like Shell or Split, can then be performed on the stitched
solid.
Use the middle command \ to exclude selected surfaces from the yellow
composite surface. Excluded surfaces appear translucent.
Use the command at the far right to import objects as individual surfaces.
Individual surfaces appear in blue.
7 Expand the Logo node to display the eight surfaces that comprise the
letters of the Autodesk logo. Click the + command to the left of the logo
name. Observe that the icon changes to \ indicating that all eight surfaces
are excluded from the composite surface. The logo does not appear in
the keyboard model.
8 Click OK to close the dialog box. The translated Alias file now appears
in the graphics window as an Autodesk Inventor part file comprised
entirely of surface features.
NOTE Observe that the Logo surfaces do not appear under the
Keyboard.wire node because they were excluded previously in this
procedure.
9 Close the file without saving it.
Previous (page 1227) | Next (page 1234)
The Model browser lists the operations that were performed on the part
file after it was translated into Autodesk Inventor. Observe that the
out-of-date icon appears in front of the Keyboard.wire node in the
browser.
This icon indicates that the original Alias wire file was edited since it
was initially translated into Autodesk Inventor. Now the Autodesk
Inventor part file is no longer in sync.
The Tools layer name appears in the drop-down list at the top of the
Update Associations dialog box.
The dialog box has two lists and a color legend that appears below the
two lists. Do not be alarmed if the colors in the color legend differ slightly
from the colors that appear on your screen. It is because the color legend
is based on the Autodesk Inventor color scheme in use.
The list at the left displays the surface names from Alias. The
corresponding Autodesk Inventor surface names appear on the right.
From left to right, the four status buttons at the bottom are labeled
Matched, Orphaned, Updated, and Deleted. Observe from the
Keyboard Part File list on the right that surfaces Cavity_3_Bottom
and Cavity_3_Sides are orphaned. The two surfaces no longer exist in
the Autodesk Inventor part file after the original Alias wire file was edited.
Orphaned surface names always appear at the top of the list on the right.
These surfaces must be deleted.
NOTE There are several ways that you can delete these two surfaces. You
can select them individually, or you can hold the Ctrl key and pick them
both. Once the surfaces are selected, click the X at the top right of the dialog
box to delete. Alternatively, you can right-click and select Delete from the
context menu when the surface names are highlighted.
7 Delete Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides from the Part File list
on the right. The deleted surface names now appear in a different color
in the list. You can observe the identical color change in the graphics
window.
8 Next, select the Body layer from the layer name drop-down list at the
top of the dialog box.
Observe that four surfaces from the Alias Body layer are orphaned. In
this instance, the surfaces still exist in the two models but they have
changed significantly and must be matched.
9 To match the orphaned surfaces, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body
Import File list on the left. Then, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body
Part File list on the right. Now click the Match command = located
just to the right of the layer drop-down list.
NOTE You can also match the two surfaces by right-clicking and selecting
Match from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted.
The two surface names in the file lists change color and also appear in
this same color in the graphics window.
10 Repeat the matching process with Body_Fillet_B and the other two
surfaces. Make sure to select = (the Match command) after each pair of
surface names are selected from the lists.
11 After all four surfaces are matched, click OK to exit the Update
Associations dialog box.
There is a slight delay as the associations between the surfaces are
updated. When complete, the Autodesk Inventor part file appears in the
graphics window reflecting the changes that were made in the edited
Alias wire file.
The Update Associations dialog box also appears stating that Stitch
Surface4 cannot be built. This error message appears because the two
surfaces that were used to create Stitch Surface4 (Cavity_3_Bottom and
Cavity_3_Sides) were deleted.
12 Click Accept to close the Update Associations dialog box.
13 Expand the Sculpt1 node in the Model browser and observe the icon
next to Stitch Surface4.
14 Although not necessary, you can right-click over this node and select
Delete from the pop-up context menu if you want to remove it from
the Model browser. To remove the icon next to the Sculpt1 node,
right-click over Sculpt1 and select Edit Feature from the pop-up
context menu. When the Sculpt dialog box appears, click OK to close
the dialog box and rebuild the Sculpt feature.
15 As an optional step, move the End of Part marker above Move Body3
in the Model browser to view the revised keyboard in an unexploded
representation.
Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to open and translate an Alias wire file directly
into Autodesk Inventor. Procedures to update the part file after changes are
made to the Alias file were also provided to illustrate the associativity between
Alias wire files and Autodesk Inventor part files. Some key points of this
exercise include:
Deriving and excluding surfaces
Summary | 1243
1244
Index
A
animations
tutorials
N
630, 636
B
bearings
tutorials 878
bolted connections
tutorials 784
C
compression springs
tutorials 906
constraints
tutorials 36
Content Center
tutorials 332, 502
navigating
SteeringWheels
ViewCube 20
20
P
parameters
tutorials 370
Positional representations
tutorials 636
projects
tutorials 2
shafts
tutorials 820
sheet metal
tutorials 951
Skeletal Modeling (top-down
design) 650
sketch constraints
tutorials 36
sketches
constraints 36
spur gears
tutorials 846
SteeringWheels 20
substitutions
Level of Detail representations
Inventor Studio
tutorials 630, 636
D
disc cams
tutorials
892
F
Frame Generator
tutorials 1076
L
Level of Detail representations
tutorials 537
537
1245 | Index
1246 | Index
V
V-belts
tutorials 864
ViewCube 20
20